JP2024028505A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To create a game machine having high convenience to a manager of a game house or a player.SOLUTION: In a game machine including a ball tray capable of storing game balls, the ball tray has a ball tray rear face which is an under side face as a view from a player, and a discharge shutter impassable by a game ball in the closed state, and passable by the game ball in the open state, and a projecting projection part is provided on the ball tray rear face, and the height of the projection part from the ball tray rear face is less than a radius of the game ball, and the length from the ball tray rear face to the discharge shutter in the closed state is less than the radius of the game ball.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

Some gaming machines have operable operating members, the bottom of a frame, a ball tray, and the like.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046387 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-210475

Even with operable operating members, the bottom of the frame, and a ball tray, there is still room for improvement in convenience for game hall managers and players.

Equipped with a ball tray that can store game balls,
The ball tray has a back surface of the ball tray, which is the lower surface when viewed from the player, and a discharge shutter through which game balls cannot pass when in the closed state, and through which game balls can pass when in the open state.
A protruding portion is provided on the back surface of the spherical dish,
The height of the protrusion from the back surface of the ball dish is less than the radius of the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that a length from the back surface of the ball tray to the discharge shutter in a closed state is less than a radius of a game ball.

The gaming machine can be highly convenient for game parlor managers and players.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a perspective view of the front direction of the above-mentioned Pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko game machine from the rear with the frame member opened. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to a pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the power-on process of the main control board of the pachinko game machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko game machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a winning/failure lottery table of the Pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a fluctuating pattern lottery table during a low base state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a fluctuating pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise. It is a diagram showing the power-on process of the performance control board of the Pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during a normal game (medium low probability/low base) of a pachinko gaming machine based on the premise, during a symbol variation display (during a stop display of decorative symbols). It is a diagram showing a game performance in a situation where a reach performance with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot is being performed on the premise of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a game performance in a state where a jackpot game is being executed in a pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a game performance when the electric chew support function is in operation, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the pachinko game machine based on the premise. It is a diagram showing a perspective view of the outside of the housing of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the back side of the front panel. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the inner surface of the casing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 3 is a flowchart showing program start processing. It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing. 3 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating power-off recovery processing. It is a flowchart showing the main game progress. It is a flowchart which shows setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section clear counter management processing. It is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that constitute winning combinations in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that constitute winning combinations in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that constitute winning combinations in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the number set for each winning combination in a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination of the L mode number in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reel sheet affixed to the structural house lamp in the house lamp in 2nd Embodiment, and the transmission of the light irradiated with LED. It is a figure which shows comparison when providing a pattern area in the reel sheet in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the scenario number in one advantageous area in 3rd Embodiment, the scenario selection ratio for every setting value, and the performance scenario corresponding to each scenario. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement in a 4th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the winning combination lottery in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the list of symbol combinations which constitute a winning combination in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number set for every winning combination in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart diagram showing the end timing of the MB-A game in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the relationship between medal insertion timing and reel control in this example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the reel unit and the reel unit upper screw in this example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the opening part of the rear surface of a reel unit, and a reel unit upper screw in this example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening on the rear surface of the reel unit, the central display board protection cover, and the reel unit upper screw in this example. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having upper and lower openings in this example. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having an opening on the entire surface of the reel unit in this example. It is an operation explanatory sectional view No. 1 explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is an operation explanatory sectional view No. 2 explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a first diagram illustrating a malfunction of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a second diagram illustrating a problem with the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a first explanatory diagram of measures to prevent the problem of light source destruction of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining arrangement of a light source of a production input button and a screw in a 5th embodiment. There is a second explanatory diagram of measures to prevent the problem of light source destruction of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the mechanism which reduces the malfunction (eccentric movement) of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the irradiation range of the light source of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram of light source destruction that occurs due to a malfunction in the depression mechanism of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the Pachinko performance button in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the Pachinko performance button in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the Pachinko performance button in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the Pachinko performance button in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the Pachinko performance button in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the performance button of Pachinko in a 6th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the performance button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. FIGS. 8A and 8B are sectional views (a) and (b) illustrating the operation of a sensor detection piece in the eighth embodiment, and a diagram illustrating a storage area of a RAM. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating chattering when high active determination is adopted in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating chattering when low active determination is adopted in the eighth embodiment. It is a bottom view regarding a lower spherical dish. It is an image diagram regarding a lower ball plate. It is an image diagram regarding a lower ball plate. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine. It is an image diagram regarding a RAM clear button and an error release button. It is an image diagram regarding a RAM clear button and an error release button. FIG. 3 is a side view of the bottom of the frame of the gaming machine. It is an image diagram regarding the heat dissipation port of the payout control board case. It is an image diagram regarding the heat dissipation port of the payout control board case. It is an image diagram regarding a plurality of speakers.

(Prerequisite technology)
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS The pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "base technology") on which the present invention is based will be described below with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of a pachinko game machine related to the underlying technology, a pachinko game machine is shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and a game board installed in this pachinko game machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, please refer to these figures. Now, we will explain the mechanical configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, for convenience, the directions shown by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively.

[Mechanical configuration of Pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility. The front frame P2 is attached so that it can be laterally opened/closed and attached/detached by upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge part 10, lower hinge part 20) disposed on the front left edge of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are removably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be horizontally openable and detachable using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge part 10, lower hinge part 20). The game board P5 is removably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and is configured so that the player can see the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 that is held closed. has been done. In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be opened by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking part P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P and rotating it in either the left or right direction. , the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when a key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking part P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and front frame P2 are unlocked, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking part P30 and rotated to the left. When this is done, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the bottom of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (an upper ball plate P341 and a lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the development situation of the game, and an upper speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development situation of the game. A performance operation means P380 for performing a predetermined performance operation is attached to the center of the lower part of the glass frame P3. The button P381 can be operated by the player at any time, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself Operation input is enabled when the display is moved to an upwardly protruding state (input permission state) (multiple operations are possible with one performance operation means).

At the lower right portion of the front frame P2, a handle P204 is provided for operating the game ball and adjusting the firing strength. The lower part of the front frame P2 is further equipped with a firing device unit P240, which is not shown, but has a ball feeding mechanism P241 (sometimes referred to as a ball feeding unit) that sends out the game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one ball at a time. ), synchronizes the operations of the firing device P242, the ball feeding mechanism P241, and the firing device P242, which has a firing mechanism (a ball hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that shoots the game ball sent out from this ball feeding mechanism toward the game area P501. A launch control board P243 and the like are provided to control the launch control board P243 and the like.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is constructed based on a base material formed into a rectangular flat plate using transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5 seen from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which a performance accessory P560 (also referred to as a "movable performance device", "performance movable body", "performance movable accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front of the game board P5, there is an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle arranged from the lower center of the game board to the inside of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left. The outer rail P502 includes an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that opens leftward and is disposed between the end of the outer rail P502 at the upper right side and the lower part of the board surface. A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by an inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504. This game area P501 includes a left side area P501L (left-handed playing area) which is an area on the left side of the center accessory P540, and an area on the right side of the center accessory, based on a center accessory P540, which will be described later, arranged approximately in the center. It has a right side area P501R (right-handed hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide path for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the gaming area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown), there are a first starting prize opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning device" when a prize ball is generated) are provided, such as a normal pattern operating gate P741 (normal pattern operating gate device), a large winning hole P751 (attacker), and the like. In addition, the number of big winning holes may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of them. In addition, in this specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, there are those in which the game ball is ejected after entering the ball entry device, and those in which the game ball further flows down the gaming area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called an "incoming ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball occurs)", and it flows into the downstream gaming area like a gate-type ball entrance. ``passing'' is sometimes described separately from ``passing.'' Further, the ball entering device may be referred to as a ball entering hole, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning hole.

In addition, at the lower right of the gaming area P501, a main control display device P50, including a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, a normal symbol display device P53, etc., whose lighting is controlled by a main control board to be described later. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged approximately in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the production display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. A performance accessory P560 (movable accessory device) is provided above the center accessory P540, etc., which performs a performance operation according to the development situation of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which game balls that have flowed down without entering the prize openings of various ball entry devices can pass through. Game balls that have entered the winning holes of various winning devices or game balls that have flowed into the out port P790 flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 from front to back. The game balls are collected in the collection channel (played ball path) at the bottom of the front frame P2, and pass through the out ball sensor P792 (fired ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame to detect the total number of fired game balls. Afterwards, it is ejected from the gaming machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first starting winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole P711 is an opportunity to obtain the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole P711 is the trigger for obtaining the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol. The lottery related to the first special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after the ball is entered or after the suspension period has elapsed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second starting winning device P720 includes a second starting winning opening P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second starting winning opening P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. A normal electric accessory P770 which is a movable body to be switched is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole P721 is the trigger for the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning hole P721, The lottery related to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after the ball is entered or after the suspension period has elapsed. The second starting winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second starting winning opening P721 due to the action of the normal electric accessory P770, and an open state in which the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening P721. It changes to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. In other words, the second start-up winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start-up winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the second start-up winning device P720 has a structure that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start-up winning opening, and the second start-up winning device P720 is set at a predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery), which will be described later. When the ball is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball. In addition, various aspects of the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 are known, and the structure may not change the ease of ball entry by opening the movable body P771. '' may be expressed as "easy ball entry state (easy ball entry mode)" and "difficult ball entry state (difficult ball entry mode)," respectively.

The general winning device P730 includes a left general winning device P730L placed in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R placed in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to this basic technology, three general winning ports P731La to P731Lc are configured as one unit as the left general winning device P730L, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. configured as a part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as in other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and position of the general winning holes P731 of the Pachinko gaming machine that are assumed are just an example, and it may be configured such that they are arranged only in the right-hand playing area P501R.

The normal pattern operating gate device P740 (normal pattern operating port) is provided as a starting ball opening corresponding to the normal pattern game. This standard operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the gaming area of the game board. Passage of the game ball to the activation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the second starting winning device P720, that is, whether or not to activate the normal electric accessory P770. . In addition, as a modified example, it is also possible to configure the above-mentioned general winning hole P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and in this case, in addition to the function to execute the normal symbol lottery, the prize ball It is also possible to provide the function of generating the winning device as one winning device (general drawing operation winning opening).

The big winning device P750 is configured with a big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a small win. It is sometimes referred to as an "attacker (device)." The grand prize device P750 has an open state in which the game ball can enter the grand prize opening P751 or can easily enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) involving opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. In addition, even if the special electric accessory P755 is activated, if the movable body P756 that constitutes the grand prize opening P751 becomes in a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "opening pattern"). has.

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may include a specific area P760 (referred to as a "V zone" or "V area") through which the game ball can pass, and depending on the function, a "probability variation function activation" may be provided. (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating a probability fluctuation function (described later) after a jackpot game, triggered by passing through a specific area during a jackpot game, and (b) passing through a specific area during a small win game. Activate the accessory continuous activation device (a flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) In a specific round during the jackpot game, For example, the subsequent round may be determined to be executed or not executed based on whether a region has been passed or not. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area", and by distributing the flow path by the action of the opening/closing member P761, It may be configured to pass through the specific area P760 or other non-specific areas. Further, during a jackpot game or a small win game, there may be a period in which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period in which it is invalid.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the big prize winning device P750 is provided in the right side area P501R (right-hand hitting area) in the gaming area P501. Therefore, in a jackpot game or a small win game, when firing a game ball toward the game area P501, the ball can easily enter the big winning opening P751 by aiming at the right side area P501R, or hitting the right side. It has become.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 is attached which has a front and rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 in the center. The back set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 that stores a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 that allows the game balls to flow down from the storage tank P401, and a gutter member that sweeps away the game balls guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410, a back passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, etc. are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing game balls from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and an effect control board that controls the overall effect according to the game progress under the control of the main control board P40. P41, an image control board P42 that controls image display according to the development of the game, etc. are attached. In the pachinko game machine P of this premise technology, the performance control board P41 and the image control board P42 constitute a performance display unit in an assembled state integrated with the performance display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power source that receives power from the gaming facility and supplies power to various control boards and electrical/electronic parts. A board P44 (not shown) and the like are attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are installed in a predetermined position on the back of the game board P5 or the back of the back set unit P4 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case with a caulking structure and a sealing structure. are arranged respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable), so that the pachinko game machine P can proceed with the game and execute the performance. .

[Functional block]
FIG. 5 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine based on the premise.

A pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power used within the gaming machine based on AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operations of the game and the progress of the game. ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls and the firing of game balls, and a performance control board P41 that controls performance operations and processing. It is composed of several forms. Note that the arrows shown in the figure indicate the upper transmission/reception relationships by solid line arrows, and the broken line arrows indicate electrical connection relationships by function.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 powers a main control board P40, an effect control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected thereto, which will be described later. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power necessary for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in a state of

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a big winning opening P751 (big winning opening switch P752), Detection switches related to the progress of various games such as the normal drawing opening P741 (normal drawing operating opening switch P742), general winning opening P731 (left general winning opening, right general winning opening), and out opening P790, which are other detection switches. It is connected to switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring fraud, such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the occurrence of various gaming states from these switches, and determines the control content related to game progress. A special electric accessory driving means P70 that is driven to expand the prize opening P751, and a normal electric accessory that is driven to make the ordinary electric accessory P770 into a state where it is easy to enter the ball when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information related to the driving mode is outputted to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors, etc. connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board, and notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information. It receives information outputted from a terminal called an output port, such as a firing permission signal for the accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and the firing device P242, and controls the respective apparatuses and devices.

The main control board P40 also includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that display variations in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot or small win, and the game status. a main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as a status indicator light P55 that notifies the player, and a performance display device P59 that displays the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal play, that is, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of balls fired) Connect with etc. Regarding the "base value," there are many other accounting methods, such as data that excludes winnings from the starting winning slot P711, etc., but this will be explained separately and assumed as necessary for the present invention. The details will be omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each device. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the production control board P41 and payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls transmitted from the main control board P40 and the control status of the main control board, and also controls the payout of prize balls by the player using the handle P204. In response to the operation, control related to the firing of game balls by the firing device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 includes, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by rotation of the payout motor P411. The firing device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one ball at a time to a position where they can be fired by the ball feeding unit P241, and then applies a batting mallet to the game balls. It is configured to fire the game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling errors that occur during gaming. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The performance control board P41 includes a performance display device P80, a drive source and position detection sensor for the performance movable accessory P560 (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, a performance position detection sensor), and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production input device unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 ("decoration lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350) ), and various control signals are sent and received between them. In addition, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays images such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something that does. In addition, in the Pachinko gaming machine based on this premise, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41, but a separate audio control board equipped with an IC for audio control, etc. is provided to control the speaker P83. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission and reception between the main control board P40 and the production control board P41 is performed in one direction so that the data is sent and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the production control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the production control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the production control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the production control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on this premise, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, similar to the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the Pachinko game machine P as the basic technology configured as described above will be explained for each game state. The "gaming state" can be roughly divided into a "normal gaming state" and a "special gaming state" in which it is easier to obtain game balls compared to the normal gaming state. The "normal gaming state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special gaming state." Among the normal gaming states, there are gaming states that have different degrees of advantage for the player when it comes to acquiring the right to transition to the special gaming state. Among the multiple normal gaming states, there are states in which it is relatively easy for the player to obtain the right to move to the special gaming state (a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)). state) is expressed as a "specific gaming state." The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big win game" and "small win game", and the special electric accessory drive means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, the big prize opening P751 is opened, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state where it becomes easy.

[Normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)]
First, a description will be given regarding the gaming method and the progress of the game in the normal gaming state. Note that the normal gaming state described here is an explanation regarding the "normal gaming state (low probability/low base state)" (see Figure 6), excluding specific gaming states, and is generally used in situations where a player starts playing. This is to explain the gaming state, and the gaming method in the specific gaming state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" will be described later.

As a method of playing in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to fire a game ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the amount of operation of the handle P204 to cause the game ball to fire toward the left side area P501L (left-handed hitting area) of the gaming area. Operate to play the game.

When a game ball is fired by a player into the left side area P501L of the game area, the fired game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called an "obstacle nail" or "nail"), not shown. , while displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting prize opening P711 located approximately at the lower center position in the gaming area P501 of the game board called "Heso" or the like, or to the general prize opening P731L of the left general prize winning device. Either the ball enters (wins) or the ball does not enter any winning hole and enters the out port P790 as a played game ball. When a ball enters the first starting winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ), and the player obtains a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first starting prize opening P711, and a gaming state (gaming result) that can occur when a player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L in the gaming area is displayed. , When a ball enters the first starting prize opening P711, game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special symbol 1 starting port switch P712, it not only pays out a predetermined number of prize balls, but also performs the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get a random value to do. The random number value can be obtained by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing a process to obtain a random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when checking the detection information of the game ball, or obtaining a random number value updated by software (soft latch). Yes, they can be used depending on the random number value to be obtained, or they can be used in combination. In addition, when the ball enters the general winning hole, the random number related to the special symbol is not obtained, and only the payout of the prize ball is performed.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". "Win/fail lottery" is a process that determines whether the lottery result using the obtained random numbers is a "big hit" or a "miss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "small win"). ). “Winning symbol lottery” (sometimes simply referred to as “symbol lottery”) is a process of determining the display pattern of stop-display symbols that indicate the win/fail lottery results on the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, it is possible to determine one symbol from multiple stop display symbols for one lottery result (big hit, small win), and depending on the stop display symbol determined here, "big hit" or "small win" This makes it possible to vary the execution mode of special games. "Fluctuating pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing a stop display symbol indicating the result of a winning/failure lottery is to be displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time during which a variable display indicating that a lottery has been executed (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern"). It is common to use different random numbers for "win/fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery", respectively. called "random numbers". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special symbol 2 starting port switch P722, is also a similar "special symbol lottery". Further, a description regarding the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming method in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left area P501L of the gaming area. Then, a game ball is entered into the first starting winning hole P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating a "big hit" ("small win") is displayed on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol, a game aiming at acquiring the right to execute a special game is played.

Although it has been mentioned above that in the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery, but in the Pachinko gaming machine P which is based on the premise, During this special symbol fluctuation display period, if a new ball enters the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole P711, second starting winning hole P721), a predetermined number of special symbol drawings will be executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times as a suspension function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning hole P711. In addition, the hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the Pachinko gaming machine P based on this basic technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can also be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random numbers used for special symbol drawings.

In this manner, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area to execute the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. In the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that you have won a lottery result that results in a special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small win" and have acquired the right to move to the special gaming state. , the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special gaming state]
Next, a description will be given regarding the gaming method and the progress of the game in the special gaming state. The special game state includes "big hit (game)" and "small win (game)," but in both cases, the special electric accessory P755 is activated, that is, the special electric accessory drive means P70 is activated from the main control board P40. This is a state in which a drive signal is output to the jackpot P751 and the jackpot P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The major difference is that the "small win" is based on the operation of an actuating device, whereas the "small win" ends with a single operation of a special electric accessory. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric accessory (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous activation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, while the total opening time of the big prize opening P751 in the operating state of the accessory continuous operating device (jackpot) is allowed up to 30 seconds, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point where the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the gaming method and game progress in the special gaming state, a jackpot will be explained as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko game machine P based on the underlying technology is chronologically called the "special game start demo" (in the case of a jackpot, it is called the "jackpot start demo", "win combination operation start demo", etc.), In the case of a win, there is a production period called a "small win start demo" to notify the player that they have won various special games, and a one-time performance period called a "round (game)" (also called a "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (in the case of a jackpot, it is called "jackpot end demo", "win combination operation end demo", etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called "small win end demo") ), which mainly consists of a period for notifying game results (such as the number of game balls acquired) during the special game and the type of normal game state (including a specific game state) to which the game will be transferred.

Next, the game method during each special game period mentioned above will be explained. First, during the "Special Game Start Demo" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the underlying technology, the big prize opening P751 is placed in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the gaming area, and the normal gaming state (low probability/low Even if you fire a game ball into the left area P501L similar to the base state), you can hardly expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so in the special game, before the round game starts where the big winning hole P751 becomes easy to enter the ball. In addition, the display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and display lamp display a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to fire the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the gaming area. Execute using P82. In accordance with the right-handed hitting notification effect, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the firing strength of the game ball, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right-hand area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the gaming area. (perform a right-handed hit).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko game machine P based on the underlying technology, the drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory drive means P70 causes the big winning hole P751 to be in the easy-to-enter state or A production that congratulates players for winning a jackpot (small win) during a special game execution period when the player is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and specifies that the normal game state that is transitioned to after the special game is more advantageous for the player. A performance such as a performance suggesting a game state is executed. The player fires the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big prize opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (gaming)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big prize opening determined based on the type of jackpot (small win) is completed (the opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the ball. Then, depending on the type of special game state being executed (type of jackpot, small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to a ``special game end demo'' state.

Next, during the "Special Game End Demo" period, the pachinko machine P based on the underlying technology will display the number of game balls acquired during the current special game state, and the number of games played consecutively during the specific game period described below. Performing a display that notifies the total number of game balls acquired in the special game state (obtained without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability/low base state)), or performing a normal game that transitions after the special game state. Performances of notification of the type of state and notification of the gaming method in the destination gaming state (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification performance) are executed. The player operates the handle in preparation for a game according to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred based on the performance being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P, with some exceptions, when a jackpot game is executed as a special gaming state, the player enters a special gaming state called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. The game is now in a state where it is easy to obtain the right to move to , and the player can enjoy a so-called "consecutive game" in which the specific game state and the special game state are repeated in succession.

[Specific gaming state]
Next, the "specific gaming state" will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific gaming states. There are "probability states" and "base states" as elements that differentiate these types, and a specific gaming state is constituted by a combination of these.

(probability state)
"Probability status" is a probability variation function based on the operating state of the "probability variation function" (also referred to as "probability variation"), which is a function that varies the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery. is activated and the winning/failure lottery in the special symbol lottery has a higher probability of being a "jackpot" than when it is not activated, which is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability variable state", "probability variable state") The state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is expressed as "low probability (state)." The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a jackpot for one special symbol drawing is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "proportion (expected value) of game balls that will be obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally used for ordinary electric accessories. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (more advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state) is called the "high base (state)" (also referred to as the "den support state"). . Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "Electric Chew Support Function" is not activated, the recommended launching position of the gaming balls may be changed to indicate "If you shoot a predetermined number of gaming balls, you will receive a prize ball." If the percentage of game balls that are played increases, it can also be expressed as a "high base state.""High base (state)" means that during the period until the special gaming state is acquired, the number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls increases (they are more likely to be paid out), thereby reducing the consumption of game balls and making special This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in that he or she can aim to obtain the gaming state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), but it is mainly a combination of three functions (including at least one ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "normal symbol probability change", "normal symbol time saving", and "opening extension (of normal electric accessories)". "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state where the probability of activating the normal electric accessory in the "normal pattern lottery" is high. "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing the normal symbol lottery until displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" is to release the ordinary electric accessory in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the winning hole related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the winning type in the ordinary symbol lottery. This refers to a change in the operation of the ball, and one example of this is to extend the total time during which a normal electric accessory is in an easy-to-enter state.

The "normal symbol lottery" is different from the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, which is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the target of the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. Although they are different in that the trigger for execution is the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern activation gate device P740, they are almost the same in that the winning/failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns are determined by lottery and that they have a hold function. When specifically expressing the lottery of winning or losing symbols, symbols, and fluctuating patterns related to regular symbol drawings, we use "common symbols" (or " It is expressed by adding "normal pattern") at the beginning.

We have explained the "probability state" and "base state" as elements that differentiate the types of "specific gaming states," but there are also other elements that make up the specific gaming states, such as "time saving state" ("fluctuating time reduction state") (also referred to as a state in which the "fluctuating time reduction function" is activated). Generally, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variable pattern) for each special symbol is shortened, and the number of executions of special symbol drawings per unit time is increased, which is more convenient for the player. This is an advantageous situation in that many special symbol drawings can be drawn per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the "high probability state" and "electronic chew support state" described above, and it is rare that it alone constitutes a specific gaming state.

[Specific gaming state 1: low probability/high base state]
Returning to the explanation regarding the "specific gaming state," first, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for (1), (8), and (12) in Figure 6 are (a) winning a jackpot game in each state, (b) passing a predetermined number of games ) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 1 returns to the specific gaming state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, the transitions are as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 1; and (d) An example of this is that a predetermined number of games have elapsed (*(2) only). In addition, the "number of games" refers to the "number of times special symbol lottery is executed" as an example.

When transitioning to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state), the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed is in a state in which both the above-mentioned "electronic chew support function" and "fluctuation time shortening function" are activated. In the premised layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P, there is a normal figure actuation gate device P740 in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and a second starting winning device related to the normal electric accessory. A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing a "right strike" to fire a game ball into the right region P501R (right strike region) of the game area. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed is also controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, in the case of specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), the player fires the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed hitting area) of the game area, The first step is to let the ball enter (pass) the operating gate device P740, and by entering (pass) the ball into the normal pattern operating gate device P740, a normal symbol lottery is received on the main control board P40. In the normal symbol lottery in specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), there is a high probability (approximately 1/1) of winning due to the activation of the regular symbol probability change function, so 1 game ball is sent to the regular symbol operating gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 is activated, in the pachinko game machine P which is based on the premise, the second starting prize opening P721, which is the trigger for the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, becomes in the state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the player can enter the second As a procedure, a game ball is fired toward the second starting prize opening P721. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute a special game (big hit, small win) A lottery will be held to obtain the .

Specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot was executed, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). In the case of acquiring a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific gaming state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the acquisition of a small winning game (or the acquisition of multiple small winning games, a specific type of In some cases, the game is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 2: High probability/high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to obtain a jackpot game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 2 returns to the specific gaming state 2 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, the transitions are as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for these (4), (8), and (10) are (a) acquiring the type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 2; and (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has elapsed.

When transitioning to specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), in the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed, the "probability variation function" is activated in addition to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state). The difference is that it is a "high probability (state)." The progress of the game and the method of playing in specific gaming state 2 are the same as in specific gaming state 1, but the difference is that the player can win the jackpot earlier because the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the special symbol lottery. do.

Specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot is executed, the type of jackpot that was executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). Generally, the specific game state 2 does not end when a small winning game is obtained. If specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends depending on the number of games played, normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state), or specific gaming state Transition to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 3: High probability/low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the gaming method in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained.

The transition to specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the gaming state transitions shown in (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. The game state transition conditions for (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only). Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific gaming state 3 is transferred to the specific gaming state 3 again via a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, transitions occur as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring the type of jackpot game that will cause the transition to the respective game state in specific game state 3, and (d) An example of this is that a predetermined number of games have elapsed (*(6) only).

When transitioning to specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P becomes a "high probability (state)" in which the "probability variation function" is activated, and specific gaming state 1 and specific gaming Unlike state 2, the "electronic chew support function" and the "fluctuating time reduction function" are not activated. In the premised layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, there is a normal figure operating gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area, and a second starting winning device related to the normal electric accessory. The mouth P721 is placed, but if the player performs "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed hitting area) in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). The probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage to hitting right.

Therefore, the player will proceed with the game by firing the game ball into the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the gaming area, and since this is a high probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is low. The game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high price.

Specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the gaming state transition conditions (for example, if a jackpot is executed, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) that led to the transition to the state. The game ends when the number of games (the number of times the special symbol lottery is received) passes or when a new jackpot game is obtained (note that there is a case where the game returns to the main state after the jackpot game). Generally, the specific game state 3 does not end when a small winning game is obtained. When the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

Note that the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the premised pachinko game machine P, in which the normal electric accessory P770 is placed in the right area P501R (right-handed area). The arrangement and configuration of the winning device on the game board, such as arranging the third starting winning hole of the type that does not have a type, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol drawings can be won in a short time. Depending on the control of the time-saving state, the game state may be such that "right-handed play" is recommended.

As explained above, in the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the game progresses through a plurality of game states, but it is not necessarily necessary to have all the game states described above. Therefore, among the game machine specifications formed by a combination of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the assumed Pachinko game machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of special symbol drawings are "(until next time) fixed variation" and "ST (number of times cut fixed variation)". , ``V definite change (also referred to as ``ball definite'', ``attack round system'')'', and ``latent definite change'' can be adopted. Differences in gaming machine specifications due to differences in probability variation functions are sometimes expressed as, ``This gaming machine is a XX machine (eg, an ST machine)''. In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during a small winning game, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (that is, the transition to the jackpot game). There is also a gaming machine specification called "Kotori V".

[(Until next time) Definitely different]
First of all, I will explain about "(until next time) Definite Change". "Until next time" is generally defined as "Specific gaming state 2 ( This figure shows the specifications of a Pachinko game machine in which the high probability/high base state continues until the right to the next jackpot game is acquired. In other words, a gaming machine with "probability change until next time" is configured so that the specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right for the next jackpot game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol changes, etc. has been done.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the control is performed to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). In addition, in the case of "a pachinko gaming machine in which specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) continues until the right to the next jackpot game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next jackpot. Although it is sometimes referred to as "Until next time, probability change", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required regarding the electric chew support function. In this way, it is a definite change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not activated, so it is expressed separately as a ``latent definite change.''

[ST (Number of cutting definite changes)]
Next, "ST (number of times cutting sure change)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "Specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) performs a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of times)" This shows the game machine specifications for a Pachinko game machine that continues until the symbol change is executed or the right to a jackpot game is acquired.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the control is performed to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state). In addition, similar to the above-mentioned "Until the next time, it is certain", until the gaming state is in the specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) and the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, or the right to play the jackpot game is acquired. Regarding the case to be controlled, it is also possible to configure it to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (number of times cut probability variable)", the period in which the gaming state is controlled by ST is "until 10,000 special symbol drawings have been drawn", etc., in a high probability state. If the specifications of the gaming machine are such that a jackpot is guaranteed until the next time, it may be expressed as ``until the next time.''

As mentioned above, "until next time definite change" and "ST (number cut definite change)" differ in the end of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "definite change state" as a gaming machine specification. It is. On the other hand, with regard to the activation or non-operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in a specific gaming state, in other words, the start of the execution of the probability variation function, as in the "V Kokuhen ("Kyu Koku" "Attack Round System")" described below, In some cases, game machine specifications ("specs") are expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V definite change]
Next, the specifications of the gaming machine called "V Kokuhen" will be explained. "V Definite Change" is a "specific area P750" (referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.) provided in the big winning hole P751 during a jackpot game before the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state. ), if the passing of a game ball (``V winning'') is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function will be activated after a jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of a pachinko gaming machine that performs control to shift to a specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. Regarding the "specific region" used for "V probability variation", it may be particularly referred to as "probability variation function operating region".

As mentioned above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the jackpot game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously explained "Probability variation until next time" or with the same control as "ST", "V probability variation (V-loop)" ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate different gaming machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V-kokuhen" as the gaming machine specification, if you do not win a V prize during a jackpot game, the probability change function will not operate after the jackpot game, and the probability change function will not operate in the normal game state or in the specific game. Controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not to enter a game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the jackpot game depending on whether or not a V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operating mode of the electric chew support function. For example, in the "V Loop" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability fluctuation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next jackpot, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability fluctuation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function may be limited to 100 special symbol drawings.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "Small Hit V" will be explained as a gaming machine specification that can provide an advantageous gaming state to the player in terms of winning a jackpot without having a probability variation function.

“Small win V” is a “specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the machine operates the accessory continuous actuation device following the small win game, that is, starts the jackpot game. be. In other words, it is a gaming machine specification that allows you to win a jackpot game by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win without getting a jackpot result as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a "Type 1 (Pachinko)" game that activates a continuous actuation device or a special electric accessory as a result of a special symbol lottery, and a special electric accessory when the continuous actuation device is not activated. It is a specification that activates the accessory continuous activation device when it passes through a specific area P760 during operation (while the big prize opening P751 is open), and is sometimes expressed as "1st type small hit V", while it is different from conventional pachinko games. It is sometimes referred to as a ``1-type 2-type Pachinko machine'' because it has a gameplay similar to the specifications of a so-called ``2-type Pachinko'' game machine.

Generally, pachinko gaming machines that adopt "small hit V" as a gaming machine specification do not have a probability variation function (probability variation function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the electric chew support function. In other words, when the electric chew support function is activated, it becomes a trigger for changing the special symbol that makes it easier to win a small hit (for example, win a small hit with 1/2) in the winning hole related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easier to win a prize. By configuring with a starting prize opening, it is easy to win a small prize under the condition that the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big prize by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing this, instead of increasing the random number range that results in a jackpot like in the variable probability function, the game is designed to increase the possibility of winning a jackpot through small wins.

[Other gaming machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly explained below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a situation in which a specific gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function or electric chew support function is activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of a jackpot game (so-called "consecutive winnings" state), and is predetermined. Even if a jackpot game in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is supposed to operate when the specified number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function will not operate. This is a function that limits operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "definite change limiter", and the function that limits the "denchu support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "time saving limiter". call. A gaming machine equipped with a limiter function is referred to as a "limiter machine."

(Fall)
"Falling" is a gaming machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability varying function every time a special symbol lottery is held during a period when the probability varying function of the special symbol lottery is in operation. Show specifications. In a situation where the Denchu support function is operating together with the probability variation function, if you win the lottery, the Denchu support function may end at the same time as the probability variation function ends, or only the probability variation function may end. The operation of the power supply support function may continue.

Note that it is possible to combine multiple gaming machine specifications mentioned above. For example, when "ST" and "fall" are combined, in the case of specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), ( Specified gaming state 2 (High The probability/high base state) ends (transfers to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that governs the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. Furthermore, regarding the pachinko game machine P which is the premise of the description of this embodiment, the description will be made on the premise that the pachinko game machine P adopts "ST (variable number cut)" as the game machine specifications (specs) mentioned above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation "P-s〇〇" indicating a processing step in the figure will be described as "step 〇〇" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be explained with reference to FIG. 7.

When power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial settings are to appropriately perform settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initialization is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed, and based on these processing contents, gaming stop state setting processing (step 1008) is executed. ).

To explain in more detail, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) involves setting a "setting value" for changing the advantageous degree of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (in particular, the operating probability of the accessory continuous operating device, that is, the jackpot probability). ”, and the flag indicating whether or not the “settings confirmation process” to check the “setting value” is executed. This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to establish (turn on or not) in the game stop state setting process that will be performed later. In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, a frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame, and may be referred to as a door open switch, a door open sensor, or a frame open sensor) ), whether the ram clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko gaming machine P turns off the power normally when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the gaming state at the time the power-off occurred is correctly stored. This is a process to check whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, it is treated as an error and the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008), which will be described later. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop the process.

The "gaming stop state setting process" (step 1008) sets a flag to prevent the player from actually being able to play after the power-on process is completed and the main loop process is started to start the game. Based on the processing results of input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), "settings change state", "settings confirmation state", "unrecoverable" This is a process to set a flag to cause the game to proceed to one of the game progress disallowed states (error state). Details of the "gaming stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and will be explained based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the slot is open or not based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the process of the subsequent step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the Pachinko machine is powered on, it is assumed that some of the required operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is not completed. Calculate the setting key switch operation information from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Note that, although not shown, regardless of whether the result of step 1102 is YES or NO, the bits in the 1-byte data whose frame is being opened are also calculated to become off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined to indicate that "a setting change operation has been performed." In the assumed pachinko game machine P, the situations in which it is determined that there is a "setting change operation" are (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. (rotation operation is being performed), and (3) ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information on the frame release switch P131 in the 1-byte data is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; (One piece of data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "settings changing" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is ended ( Step 1106, Step 1118). On the other hand, if the determination in step 1104 is NO, the process moves to the subsequent step 1108. In addition, if the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of a recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), the initial setting value is Data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the area for storing the setting value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined whether a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that occurs when the ram clearing and setting value setting (change) processing is required when the game cannot proceed due to a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or setting value abnormality, for example. refers to. The judgment in step 1108 is based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing to determine whether or not to set the gaming stop state. . If it is determined that it should be in an error state (YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is ended (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process moves to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, the state when progressing to the relevant step is as follows:
(A) When an operation to move to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, when it is determined that there is a "setting change operation", (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (frame is being opened when the power is turned on); , (2) Setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) Ram clear switch P48 is on, are not satisfied.
(b) When a ram clear operation for clearing data is performed, in other words, (2) setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) ram clear switch P48 is on is not satisfied. When you are satisfied,
(c) When the power is turned on without any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "RAM clear operation", etc.
The situation is one of the following. In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) shows that (a) the bit data indicating on/off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) the ram clear switch is "1 (on data)". This is either a situation in which the bit data indicating on/off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", or (c) all 1 byte data is off data (for example, all bits are "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine clears the ram and then returns to the playable state. In order to make the transition, processing is performed to clear the game stop state flag (step 1114). On the other hand, in situations other than the RAM clear operation, the current 1-byte data will be set as is, and at this time, if the game stop state flag is changed to the "setting confirmation state" (step 1112) If the determination is NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "Setting confirmation in progress" ( Step 1118). In addition, if there is no RAM clear operation or operation to transition to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag, Set as no game stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored, the main In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of game progress control executed after transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referenced, and the game progress described as "basic game progress" is referenced. However, these controls will be described later in the explanation of interrupt processing.

Returning to the explanation of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be explained. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether a ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is when the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Note that this process is executed whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined portion of the storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent steps 1014 to 1020, processing is performed to set a performance control command (performance command) from the main control board P40 to the performance control board P41 for recognizing the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that were not sent when the power was cut off last time (when the power cutoff occurred). Then, in step 1016, information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command, and if it is determined in step 1018 that the game is not in a stopped state, in step 1020, the generated return A performance control command indicating the game state that has been achieved is set in an area for storing transmission data of the performance control command.

When the processing related to setting the performance control command at the time of power-on is completed, necessary data (drive signal ) is outputted from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

When the power-on process up to step 1022 is completed, a process is performed to set the interrupt processing time interval for the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 1024). In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the interval at which interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the process moves to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power outage occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, in the main loop processing of the main control board, first, in step 1026, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and until the main loop processing is completed (in step 1036, interrupt processing is prohibited). ) limits execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer is used to monitor the occurrence of a runaway of the CPU of the main control board P40 (such as a situation in which the processing loops and stops progressing). Clear (initialize) the area that stores timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power-off has occurred (for example, whether a power-off signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). , if a power outage has occurred, a power outage process (step 1032) that stores the current gaming state, stores power outage information and checksum information, and stops the processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If the situation is such that a power outage has not occurred, the process moves to the next one.

In step 1034, processing is performed to update the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the random numbers used for the normal symbol lottery. Note that some of these random numbers are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is a process to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. In addition, if there are processes that are executed irregularly in interrupt processing, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the last process in the main loop, in which interrupts are permitted. Immediately after, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts, but when the process of step 1036, which enables interrupts, is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred) If there is an input to the CPU of the main control board P40 indicating a state in which the current state has occurred, an interrupt process to be described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (also referred to as "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be explained with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program, which can be changed depending on the game machine specifications, is generally fixed. It is configured to read and control in the order of. Processing related to those submodules will be briefly explained below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt processing, a watchdog timer clearing process is provided. This process is the same process as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
The input port confirmation process checks the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, thereby obtaining information that makes it possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process of generating. (Step 2004)

Information input to the input port includes input signals related to human operations, such as input signals indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and setting key switch P49, and input signals indicating the operation status (touching or non-touching) of the handle P204. , Input signals indicating game results by detection of game balls such as special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712 and big winning opening switch P752, magnetic sensor P73, door open sensor P131, vibration detection sensor P72, etc., are provided for fraud monitoring. There are input signals indicating the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that is the same data (same bit) in all the reads is input data for this interrupt (referred to as "level data"). ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. In addition, for the part of the data read three times that was not the same data in all reads, the data determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4ms ago) will be adopted as the level data, that is, the data determined by the current interrupt If the data cannot be read normally, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Once the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit where the input data changed from off to on). Data identifying the switch whose input was turned on by this interrupt is stored.

(Random number update processing)
Random number update processing is performed using software from among various random numbers such as winning/losing random numbers, random symbols, and fluctuating pattern random numbers for special symbol drawings, regular symbol winning/falsifying random numbers for regular symbol drawings, regular symbol random numbers, and regular fluctuating pattern random numbers. This is a process of updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random value to be updated (step 2006). In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, the random numbers used for special symbol drawings and normal symbol drawings are those that are updated at the random number generation circuit at the update cycle on the circuit, and those that are updated at the software cycle. By combining these specifications, the system is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, the soft random numbers are updated as described above, but the update method is as follows.
(a) Update the random number by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) and setting it as the lower limit (or upper limit) when it exceeds the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range;
(b) A method that subtracts (or adds) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and if it exceeds the random number range, adds (or subtracts) the value of the random number range + 1 (or random number range - 1),
(c) Repeat increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Those that repeat (also called initial value update type random numbers),
Examples of various update methods include: Note that the updating method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any updating method may be used as long as the randomness of the random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on processing is on data, and if it is not on data, that is, the pachinko gaming machine is If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this processing is configured to exit.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt is Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), if the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled, and then Depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state", a production control command for returning (or starting) the production to the production control board is set.

In addition, in the power-on process (see Figure 7), if the game stop flag is "settings changing", the role of the "settings change switch" at this interrupt timing is changed until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "Settings changing", if the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is changed to the next one in the predetermined change order. Change the data to match the set value. For example, if the pachinko game machine P has set value data in which the settings change in order from 1 to 6, each time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the settings are set in this setting control process. A process of increasing the value by "1" (if the setting value before the operation is 6, change it to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, by providing the processing for the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see Figure 9), the operations of the setting key switch and setting change switch can be monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. , a program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see Figure 7), which enables the output of display data to the display device in the LED output process described later, and for which interrupt processing cannot be set separately. Setting is optional. Note that during the power-on process, the configuration may be such that monitoring of switches, control of the display device, and updating of setting values related to setting changes and setting confirmations are performed.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the game stop flag data generated during the power-on process (see Figure 7) executed when the pachinko game machine is powered on, and checks whether the game is stopped or not. This is a process to check whether the (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1". ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which it is necessary to stop the game), and it is assumed that the game is stopped. Accessory object control processing (step 2028)) is omitted.

In the assumed Pachinko gaming machine P, the states that require the game to be stopped, that is, the state in which the player is unable to play, are "Changing settings," "Checking settings," and "Unrecoverable error." An example of such a state is "currently occurring".

(timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating timer data used to manage time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include managing the variable display time that is set when the variable display of special symbols starts, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during a jackpot game (opening time of the grand prize opening P751). ) etc., timer data update processing triggered by game progress, time measurement processing for error determination such as detecting ball jamming, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display device P51, P52, etc. Examples include processing for timing a switching time for switching, processing for timing a period during which information is output from an external information output terminal P77, etc. to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the like.

The timer data updated in the timer update process is stored in the storage area (RAM storage area) of the main control board P40, divided into types of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is stored in a continuous format. Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process is a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. Note that if the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", (Do not decrement if it is 0, etc.)

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P used as the premise, the cycle of one interrupt is 4ms, so if the data is from a 1-byte timer, only the managed object can be controlled that can be updated a maximum of 255 times (approximately 1 second). However, if there is no game information that is managed only within 1 second (if there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not have 1-byte timer update processing. It is. Furthermore, if it is necessary to manage time values that cannot be managed even with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data such as a "3-byte timer" that can manage a longer time.

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period during which the winning hole that can be changed to the easy ball entering mode or the difficult ball entering mode (mainly applicable to the winning hole related to the big winning hole P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770) is controlled to be in the easy ball entering mode. This is a process of setting a valid period in the valid extension period and setting an invalid period for other periods (when the winning hole is in a difficult-to-enter mode and is outside the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the pachinko gaming machine that is based on the premise, the winning period is set as the prize winning hole P751 as the big winning device and the second starting winning hole P721 which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the normal electric accessory P770. The process is as follows.

In addition, during the validity extension period, in order to treat the game ball that entered the ball just before the big winning hole P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as a valid winning, the special electric accessory P750 (special electric accessory P755) and ordinary electric accessory P770, etc., even after the control period for performing open control on electric accessories has elapsed, it is treated as a valid period, so a certain period of time that is set as appropriate depending on the structure of the electric accessory is treated as a valid period. This is the control period.

Furthermore, depending on the specifications of the game machine, if the game machine has a specific area P760 (V area), a valid extension period for the passage of the game ball regarding the specific area P760 may also be set, and in such a case, in this process, The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Winning monitoring processing)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not it is a valid winning based on the winning of game balls in various winning holes (big winning hole P751, starting hole P711, P721, general winning hole P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and determines whether the winning is valid or not. This is a process that generates information that triggers the process of generating (occurring reservation) the right to draw special symbols for balls and balls that enter the starting gate. (Step 2018)

The processing details include (a) detecting the presence or absence of a prize for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004); and (b) detecting the presence or absence of a winning opening for each winning opening that has a validity period. In this case, it is determined whether the prize has been won during the valid period, and if a valid prize has been won for each type of prize opening, furthermore, (c) the effect control command that shows the winning information for each type of winning hole to be sent to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (referred to as "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winnings for each type of winning opening (in other words, the number of times the operation trigger based on the detection of various winning openings) is updated. (updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operating hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the gaming machine Depending on the specifications, it is also possible to determine whether a game ball enters or passes through a specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of a prize ball or the occurrence of a special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected, which is necessary for the process of transmitting information to the effect that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have been passed to the performance control board P41.

(Operation port monitoring process)
The actuating port monitoring process performs processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the normal symbol lottery when the rising data of the normal symbol operating port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol actuation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the regular symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reservations does not reach the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by one, the random number of the common symbol, the random number of the common symbol, and the random number of the common symbol variation pattern are set as random numbers. Obtain from the generation circuit or obtain the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal pattern control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs processing related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on which data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the normal electric accessory object is, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Normal symbol waiting", "1: Normal symbol changing", "2: Normal symbol stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Electric accessory end demonstration in progress" and processes are performed according to each state.

《Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process》
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for a normal symbol".

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring control process, first, it is checked whether the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0" or not. If it is "0", the normal symbol control process is exited because the normal symbol variation right has not occurred. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has occurred, and it is judged that the conditions for starting the variation of the normal symbol are satisfied, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is Executes processing related to start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is to start, after decrementing the pending number information by 1 from the area that stores the pending number information related to the normal symbol lottery, the common symbol winning/failing random number, the common symbol random number, and the common symbol fluctuation pattern random number are respectively set. Call it up and perform the common pattern winning/failure lottery, common pattern pattern lottery, and common pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and clear the storage area of the pending number information. A shift process is performed so that they are processed in the stored order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbols are changing." Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening function), and it is easier to win in the high base state. , there is a tendency for a short variation display time of a normal symbol to be easily determined.

《Normal symbol fluctuation processing》
The normal symbol fluctuating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: Normal symbol fluctuating".

In the process during normal symbol fluctuation, the timer (normal This is a process in which the normal symbol display device P53 executes a variable display of normal symbols until the symbol variation display timer becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, if the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the ordinary symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the ordinary symbol display switching counter is set to "5". 5'', processing is performed to store information regarding the next light emitting pattern in the storage area that stores data for specifying the light emitting pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. Note that the ordinary figure display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value "5". That is, in the variable display of the normal symbols, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interruptions (4 ms x 5 = 20 ms). Note that the switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal symbol display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 will be switched once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). It will be done.

When the normal symbol fluctuation display time ends, that is, the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the ordinary symbol lottery is changed to the main control display device. Data for specifying the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the normal symbol display device P53 at P50 stops displaying. Then, the symbol fixing time of the normal symbol (the time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

《Normal symbol stop display processing》
The normal symbol stop display process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation processing, it is checked whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer to which the symbol fixing time is set is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, a process for making settings for moving on to the next gaming operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0", if the result of the current normal symbol lottery is "hit", the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of normal electric accessories) , call the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, etc., and change the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation" ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0" and the result of the current normal symbol lottery is "miss", the process updates the normal symbol status to "0: Normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing while normal electric accessories are in operation》
The normal electric accessory in operation process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operation process, the opening operation (change to easy ball entry mode) and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory is performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process. (Change to difficult-to-ball mode), and also monitors whether the conditions for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory are met. The operation of the normal electric accessory P770 ends when (a) a specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset movement pattern ends. (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessory ends).

When the condition for terminating the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is satisfied, an extension period of a fixed time predetermined in accordance with the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is timed in the timer area that stores the valid extension period of the ordinary electric accessory P770. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the demonstration of the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory is set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Demonstrating the end of the normal electric accessory".

《Normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process》
The normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Normal electric accessory operation end demonstration in progress".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, wait until the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process reaches "0", and then wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer reaches "0". When this happens, a process is performed to update the normal symbol status to "0: Waiting for a normal symbol".

(Start port monitoring process)
In the starting port monitoring process, when the rising data of the special pattern 1 starting port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 starting port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the special pattern lottery is performed. Perform processing related to the occurrence of suspension. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special pattern 1 starting port switch P712 and the special pattern 2 starting port switch P722 are detected, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit. can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the winning/losing random number, symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern A random number is obtained from a random number generation circuit, or a current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P which is based on the premise, there are two types of special symbols: a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 2). Since symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the number of reservations of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the number of reservations is added for each starting port, and a random number is obtained. processing is performed.

In addition, if the starting port to be processed is composed of a starting port (electric chew) related to a normal electric accessory, the starting port prize related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the validity period setting process described above. After determining whether or not the process was performed within the period, if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

In addition, when memorizing the random numbers, symbol random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, so that the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various random numbers to be held is executed is stored in advance. Information that can be estimated is generated and notified to the production control board P41 as a production control command (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-read determination command"). The advance judgment command is generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers, and when sent to the production control board P41, the production control board P41 uses it for a lottery related to the execution of the "pre-read production" described later. be done.

(Special pattern control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, we can manage the start of special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing), special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol stop symbol display processing. Execute the process.

The special symbol status includes "0: Waiting for special symbol change", "1: Special symbol fluctuating", "2: Missing symbol stopped and displayed", "3: Jackpot symbol stopped and displayed", "4: Small hit The special electric accessory status includes ``0: Waiting for a hit'', ``1: Special electric accessory operating'', ``2: Grand prize opening closed'', and ``3 : Jackpot end demonstration in progress," "4: Small win special electric current in operation," "5: Small win closed," and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress." Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, there may be cases where the game machine does not have a small win, and in that case, it does not have status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there is a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, processing is performed to prioritize and control the second special symbol, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are on hold, the variation of the second special symbol is performed first. The gaming machine specifications that are processed so that the second special symbol is started (the second special symbol changes with priority) are called "second special symbol (special symbol 2) priority consumption control", and the implementation of the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise In the description regarding the form, processing related to this type will be exemplified and explained.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When control of the second special symbol is started, first, the information on the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessory status is referred to. If the special electric accessory status is data indicating that a jackpot game or a small win game is in progress (when the special electric accessory status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing and the first of the dovetails is displayed. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Standby for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing any processing.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is to be executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area that stores the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update ends, a submodule process to be described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated in the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated in the special symbol control process. It manages timer data for controlling special symbols.

《Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process》
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a submodule process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "0: Standby for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is checked whether or not there is a pending special symbol that is being processed as a target, and if there is no pending, the process is finished, and if there is a pending, the subsequent process is executed. The following process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when starting the variation. In the special symbol lottery, data stored as setting values is first read out and inspected to determine whether or not the setting value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the appropriate lottery table is selected by referring to the data in the area where each flag indicating the gaming status etc. is stored, and the win/fail lottery, symbol lottery, and variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery results are displayed. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol changing". In addition, the contents determined by the special symbol lottery are transmitted to the production control board P41 as production control commands (win/fail commands, symbol commands, variable pattern commands), and the contents of the variable production to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. It is used as information for the decision process (lottery process). In addition, details regarding the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Special symbol fluctuation processing》
The special symbol changing process is a submodule process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "1: Special symbol changing".

In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the timer that manages the special symbol fluctuation display time is monitored until the special symbol fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery has elapsed, and the timer that controls the special symbol fluctuation display time is monitored at every interrupt until the remaining fluctuation time reaches "0". Due to the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"), the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling special symbol 1 performs processing for switching the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbol reaches "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external equipment (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixing time for fixedly displaying the stop display symbol of the special symbol, and stop display showing the stop display symbol determined as a result of the win/fail lottery and the symbol lottery. Lighting pattern data for displaying symbols on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: Loss symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed", and "4: Small win symbol is stopped and displayed" according to the winning/failure lottery result.

《Processing when the special symbol is off and the symbol is stopped displaying》
The special symbol missing symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "2: Missing symbol stop display".

In the special symbol deviation symbol stop display process, check whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol change process has reached "0", and if it has become "0", it will be processed. In addition to updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently in use to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the remaining number of games for the game status (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery will be updated. At the same time as updating, confirmation is made regarding the satisfaction of the termination condition, and when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied, control related to the transition of the gaming state (such as turning off the flag) is performed.

《Special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing》
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "3: Jackpot symbol stop display".

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, check whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has reached "0", and if it has become "0", it will be processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol being displayed is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the special electric accessory status is updated to "2: Grand prize opening closed". Furthermore, in order to terminate the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process is executed to clear the respective remaining number of times information storage area and operation flag storage area. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized based on the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, a process is further executed to transmit a performance control command for causing the performance control board P41 to execute the performance of the jackpot game (jackpot start demonstration performance). In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (which indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the gaming area is recommended) is displayed, which is one of the components of the main control display device P50. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LEDs (which are turned on at certain times) is also set.

《Special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing》
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display process is a process that is transferred when the special symbol status is "4: Small win symbol stop display".

The special symbol small hit symbol stop display process is the same as the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display process, and at the end of the symbol fixing time, the data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is set, and the right-hand hit indicator light P56 is lit. The relevant setting process is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on this basic technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the jackpot symbols have stopped, the gaming state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or It does not have a process to end the special symbol (high base state), and, similar to the special symbol is removed symbol stop display process, the game state is changed based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric accessory status is updated to "5: Small hit closed". In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, as a modified example, the specification may be designed to have a process for forcibly ending the gaming state (high probability state or high base state) when executing the small winning game in the same way as when the jackpot symbol is stopped. It is also possible.

When any one of the above submodule processes is selectively executed, the first special symbol is processed following the second special symbol. The processing of the first special symbol differs from the processing of the second special symbol only in the information referred to (for example, regarding whether fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is used instead of the special symbol status of the first special symbol). Since almost the same process is repeated (e.g., making a judgment by referring to

《Enter ball order control, parallel control》
In addition, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the explanation was based on the process related to "second special symbol priority extinguishing control", but there may be cases where a gaming machine specification different from the Pachinko gaming machine based on this premise is adopted. Alternatively, it is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process using different processes. The typical ones will be briefly explained below.

"Ball entry order processing control" is a gaming machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which they occur. The fluctuation display of one symbol is not performed while the other symbol is fluctuating, and in a certain game state, both the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. This is a specification that is often adopted when this is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "incoming ball order digestion", and simultaneously displays the fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This is the type of gaming machine that allows you to play. Since two symbols can be consumed at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol drawings per unit time. In addition, if the special electric accessory P755 is activated with the stop display of the first special symbol (when a jackpot or small hit is executed), the other symbol will be forcibly missed and the symbol will stop, or the fluctuating display will be stopped. A specification that temporarily suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is adopted as appropriate. For example, when one special symbol becomes a jackpot, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a loss, and when one special symbol becomes a jackpot or small hit, the other special symbol It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the fluctuating display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric accessory control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as special electric game status), and This is a process for managing the operation of objects (step 2028). In other words, when executing a jackpot game or a small win game, each state in the jackpot game or small win game state is controlled, and control related to opening and closing of the big win opening P751 is performed.

As mentioned above, the special electric accessory status includes "0: Waiting for winning," "1: Special electric accessory operating," "2: Big prize opening closed," and "3: Jackpot end demonstration in progress." , "4: Small win special electric current in operation," "5: Small win closed," and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress."

Among these special electric accessory statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for a win", it means that the right to execute a jackpot game or a small win game has not yet been acquired through the player's play. , the special electric accessory control process ends without performing any processing.

If the special electric accessory status is other than "0: Waiting for a hit", one of the processes described below will be executed depending on the status.

《Processing during special electric accessory operation》
The special electric accessory in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric accessory status is "1: Special electric accessory in operation" or "4: Small hit special electric object in operation." This process is a process for a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the big prize opening P751 can be controlled to open).

In the special electric accessory operation process, first, a process is performed to determine whether or not the end conditions of the round game (unit game) are satisfied. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether a specified number of prizes (also called a "count") have been won according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the activation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) has ended if either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is ended without performing any subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big prize opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for determining (b) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after checking whether there is next operation data during one round of play, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the above (a) or (b) of the round game termination conditions are met, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big prize opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric accessory status is incremented to "2: Grand prize opening closed". Then, command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as a production control command to the production control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the grand prize opening is closed》
The big winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric accessory status is "2: Big winning opening closing" or "5: Small winning opening closing". This process is a process that is controlled during the "between rounds" between so-called round games in special games, and also before the start of the first round at the start of jackpot games and small win games. When the state is controlled by the "Jackpot start demo (period)" or "Small win start demo (period)" state, or after the final round of round play has ended, the process during the win end demo described later is executed. This process is performed when the system is controlled during a period of waiting until the event occurs.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operation process has elapsed, and if the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If the period has not elapsed, the special electric accessory control process for the current interruption is ended.

If the big prize opening closing time has elapsed, whether the operation of the special electric accessory P755 (round game) that stopped operating first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not the game is successful, and different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of a round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). In addition, to judge whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 activated during the current winning game is the data of the maximum number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 in the current winning game. The judgment is made based on whether or not the winning number exceeds 1, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

In the process of closing the big winning hole, if it is determined that it is the end of the final round game, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the jackpot or small winning) (mainly winning end demo time data) and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Jackpot end demonstration in progress" or "6: Small hit end demonstration in progress", and a performance command is set to execute the winning end demo performance on the performance control board P41. I will do it. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the big winning hole P751, time value data determined as the valid extended period is stored in a timer that manages the valid extended period of the big winning hole P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of closing the big prize opening, if it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the last round (or at the time of a winning start demonstration), a performance control command to the performance control board P41 is sent to indicate what round the next round game will be. Information that allows you to identify whether there is one (N round start demo command *N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during a winning game (in the assumed Pachinko game machine, the right side area P501R (right-hand hitting area) of the game board). Sends information for instructions (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric accessory status is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory in operation" or "4: Small hit special electric power in operation", and the number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning hole P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, set the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the big winning hole P751 during the round game, and the operation pattern data of the big winning hole P751 (special electric accessory P755) during the round game. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of activations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for awarding a game ball to a player as a prize ball in response to a winning of a game ball to a winning hole arranged on the game board P5. As for the processing content, the configuration is such that the following three submodule processes are executed. (Step 2030)

《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of checking the presence or absence of a control command related to the execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on the control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43, and if the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in area.

《Payout command request processing》
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening storing the number of winnings data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is checked, and the presence or absence of unpaid winnings is checked. The confirmation process checks each winning opening in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning opening is not "0", the number of prize balls for the corresponding winning opening is determined. , performs a process of transmitting a control command for causing the payout control board P43 to execute the payout of game balls. Through this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning openings is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

《Payout command control process》
In the payout command control process, a check is made to see if the payout control board P43 has normally received information regarding the number of payouts, and in this process it is determined whether the command is received normally or some abnormality causes a communication error. That will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the dispensing command control process (it is determined whether the reception has been completed normally or an error has occurred), the next dispensing control command in the dispensing command request process will not be sent until the dispensing command request process It is temporarily interrupted by flag data that is set on and off in the payout command control process.

(Anomaly detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process of checking whether an abnormality has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for detecting fraud in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as vibration sensor P72, magnetic sensor P73, radio wave detection sensor P74, and frame opening sensor P131, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This process determines whether or not the current situation is present. In addition to various sensors, detection targets include disconnection of a harness for electrical connection and short circuits in wiring.

If abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, the corresponding error flag is turned on and stored, and then a command is set to notify the error information as a production control command to the production control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
The sensor detection determination process determines the period during which sensor or switch detection has been performed continuously based on the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and then performs the process. This is the process of establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor and switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is met, and if the condition is met, a process is executed depending on the switch to be monitored. When the monitored switch is no longer on data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch installed in the winning hole detects that the switch is continuously turned on, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the control is set to an error state and the production is performed. It performs a process of setting command information to cause the performance control board P41 to issue an error notification as a control command, and generates and requests output of signal data to notify an external device (such as a hall computer) of the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for detecting fraud, in order to determine whether it is caused by human operation or electrical noise. This also covers sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game status display process is a process that generates lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although it is called a display process, the output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is not performed by this process but by an LED output process to be described later. (Step 2036)

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, for example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) that indicates an error state, and a special symbol pending indicator light (special symbol 1 pending indicator light) that displays the number of pending special symbol drawings. Generate lighting data (lighting pattern) such as P61, special pattern 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, and use it as data output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the gaming state display process, if a blinking display is required for the LED indicator light whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern is switched by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. It will be done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the number of special symbol drawings that can be reserved can be up to 4, but the special symbol retention indicator light is composed of two LED indicator lights (special symbol 1 retention indicator light P61 , each special figure 2 hold indicator light P62 has two LEDs), so if there are three or more hold numbers, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is designed to be done.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process that performs settings for transmitting signals related to game operations to the electric accessories that are operating devices on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, etc. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of a normal electric accessory or a special electric accessory is set during normal symbol control processing or special electric accessory control processing, the normal electric accessory is Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the firing of game balls based on the player's handle operation is generated and outputted to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the firing permission signal is set depending on the communication state with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires stopping the game.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the performance control command is sent to the performance control board P41 only in the performance control command transmission process. The specification is to be transmitted (step 2040). In addition, regarding the setting of the production control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted production control command during other processing.

The premised Pachinko gaming machine P uses a storage area called a ring buffer that cyclically refers to a storage destination as an area for storing unsent performance control commands. In a storage area called a ring buffer, a "write pointer" and a "read pointer" that are updated by each process of writing (setting) a production control command and reading (sending) a production control command are used in the next process. It is designed to write and read production control commands using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the production control command is composed of two data: MODE data indicating the type of command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the production control command transmission processing, the explanation will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, it is first checked whether the information of the write pointer and read pointer described above match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process moves to the next process.

If it is determined that there is a production control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and are temporarily stored in the registers of the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the production control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value to be used in the next process.

As production control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 will be transmitted P41 to the production control board in order. First, MODE data is set to the performance command output port which is an output port for transmitting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and a strobe signal for causing the performance control board P41 to perform a reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will then output the EVENT data, but after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to ensure a sufficient period for the production control board P41 to receive the MODE data, the MODE data will be output. As in the case of transmission, setting the EVENT data to the output port and outputting the strobe signal are performed. When the production control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates a production control command reception interrupt and receives the production control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
External information output processing outputs information regarding the gaming status and security information such as error occurrences as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to external devices (data counters and hall computers) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is an on-potential for a certain period of time is transmitted. There are some that continue to output an on-potential until a condition for ending signal output is met.

In the external information output process, first, a signal related to the gaming state is generated. In order to be able to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine P assumes the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state). By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that a special game is in progress (big hit or small win), if the game is controlled in each game state, external output data is sent so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. In addition to the examples shown here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal may be generated based on information indicating the presence or absence of a variable time reduction function or information indicating a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as an output signal outputted in the external information output process, not only a signal related to the gaming state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined gaming result is outputted. For example, a signal (also called a "fixed symbol signal") that is sent each time a special symbol is displayed as a variable display and stopped, or a starting port switch (special pattern 1 starting port switch P712, special pattern 2 starting port switch 722) and the big winning opening switch P752, each time the entry of game balls into various winning openings is detected, or when the payout of prize balls based on balls entering into various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). At each time, data is set in external output data, and there are signals sent to external equipment. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with an ON potential of 128 ms, but if multiple gaming results occur in succession, After the output of the pulse signal is finished, after a certain period of off-potential output, the pulse signal is output again.

In addition, in the external signal output process, the data in the storage area that stores the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) described above, and the comparison data for checking whether an error requiring security notification has occurred are used. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing the two, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress of the game and the game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 include a first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), a second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), a first special symbol hold indicator P61 (2 LEDs), and a second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs). Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator light P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator light (total) It has a total of 32 LED display parts (8 LEDs).

In addition, the status indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to multiple gaming states, and in detail, the special pattern probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the probability variation function is activated or not, and the activation of the probability variation function of normal symbols. This refers to indicator lights such as the general pattern indicator light that indicates whether the electric chew support function is activated or not, and the error indicator light that indicates an error state.

In the LED output processing, the main control display device P50 is lit by setting the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device by 1 byte to the output port for each interrupt processing, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by the current interrupt is selected, the lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and the lighting pattern data is set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It looks like this.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the main control display device P50 is operated using a dynamic lighting method that sequentially outputs lighting data for 32 LEDs using at least four interrupt processes. It's in control.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display that the player should see as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, if a flag indicating some kind of game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , While changing the settings, checking the settings, or in the event of an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all turned off. As a modified example, when setting the game stop flag, a fixed lighting pattern set for each state may be used to perform a light emitting display. For example, during a period when settings are being changed, the main control display device P50 The configuration may be such that all of the LEDs constituting the device are turned on.

(Outside area control processing)
The out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing (processing for outputting signals used for pachinko gaming machine testing) and display on the performance display device. It is configured by a process that performs control (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated in the rules for pachinko gaming machines.

In the test signal output process, a process is performed in which information related to game results and game status to be output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display process, the game status is confirmed, the number of out balls is counted, the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls is calculated, and the results are updated as display data and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" mainly consists of "win/fail lottery,""winning symbol lottery," and "variable pattern lottery."

(Win/fail lottery)
The "win/fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed.To explain more simply, the lottery result of the special symbol , is a lottery to determine whether it is a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". Note that, depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there may be machines that do not have a "small win" as a lottery result of the win/fail lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding one special symbol is a "small hit", and the lottery result of the winning lottery of the other special symbol is a "small hit". It may be configured so that there is no "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses random numbers called "win/fail random numbers" among the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters a starting hole (first starting winning hole P711, second starting winning hole P721, etc.). A lottery will be held. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that the random number can take is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a win/fail lottery is held, the result of the win/fail lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (referred to as a "win/fail lottery table") used for the win/fail lottery depending on the gaming state and setting values. Perform processing.

FIG. 10 shows some examples of lottery tables used for the lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failure lottery table in a setting value "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 show the winning/failure lottery tables in the low probability state and the high probability state when the set value is "6", respectively.

For example, in a situation where a win/fail lottery is executed using the win/fail lottery table of FIG. 10(A), the win/fail random number in the current special symbol lottery is the random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not the first lottery result belongs to the random number range of jackpot (from "0" to "327"). Specifically, a process is performed to subtract the random number range "328" of the jackpot to be determined from the random number "1500" of the current win/fail random number. At this time, the subtraction result is "1172" and is not a negative value, so it is determined that the current win/fail random number does not belong to the jackpot random number range.

As a subsequent process, a comparison is made between the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination and the random number range ("328" to "65370") of the loss as the determination area of the success/failure lottery result following the success/failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the success/failure random numbers. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the "lost" result is stored as the win/fail lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is carried out in a high probability state for the current winning/losing random number "1500", the lottery will be drawn on the winning/losing lottery table shown in Figure 10 (B), and the random number of the first jackpot will be drawn. It is determined whether it belongs to the range (from "0" to "1639"). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning random number and the random value range is a negative value, so the winning lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot".

The pachinko gaming machine P that is based on this method employs a method of determining lottery results by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers with the random number range corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. Note that the lottery method is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and a method may be adopted in which it is directly determined whether the obtained random number matches the random number that will result in a jackpot, and different lottery methods may be used depending on the content of the lottery. may also be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
The "winning symbol lottery" is based on the results of the winning/failing lottery of the special symbol lottery described above, and includes the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the fluctuating pattern lottery (see Figs. 12 to 14). ) is a process of determining a stop display symbol of a special symbol as a lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows the jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11(A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning lottery result is a "big hit" and the jackpot symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning lottery result is a "small hit". , the small winning symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11(B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the win/fail lottery result is "lost" (see FIG. 11(B)). C) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used for the winning symbol drawing has a random value range of "1000" (from "0" to "999"), and when expressed as 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is " The data is expressed as ``0'' to ``3'', and the lower 1 byte is expressed as ``0'' to ``255''.

To explain the winning symbol lottery using a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144") In the case of a winning symbol lottery for symbols, use the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. will be obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of special symbols, the "5R Kokuhen 2" symbol will be displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, a jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol will be executed. At this time, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game is divided into the case where "5R probability change 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol and the case where "5R probability change 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning opening P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display symbol, and the control content in the specific gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions after the jackpot game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The assignment of control in these jackpot games and specific game states is determined as appropriate for each pachinko game machine P to realize gaming performance according to the specifications, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise is described so as to display symbols grouped by type of jackpot through the lottery shown in FIG. 11(A). After determining the type of jackpot called ``5R Guaranteed Variation 2'', the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns to determine the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type. , the winning symbol lottery may be performed in two steps: determination of the stop display symbol and determination of the stop display symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, there is an increased possibility that "10R probability change 5" or "10R probability change 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and It can be said that the specification is such that it is easier to win a jackpot with a large number of rounds than with a winning symbol lottery, and it is easier to win a jackpot that causes a transition to a high probability/high base state as a specific gaming state.

FIG. 11(B) shows an example of a small winning symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win", and the lottery method is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot symbol lottery table. It is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11(B), most of the winning symbols are "small winning 1" symbols, and if the winning result of the second special symbol is "small winning". ``Small win 2'' can be determined in a part of the game. Note that there may be one type of small winning symbol, or it may be configured such that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

An example of the purpose of providing multiple small winning symbols as in the pachinko game machine P that is based on the premise is to increase the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during a small winning game. For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts small win V as the gaming machine specification, in order to distinguish between small win games where it is easy to win V in a specific area and small win games where it is difficult to win V in a specific area. Examples of the purpose include differentiating the small winning symbols or differentiating the small winning symbols in order to separate the type of specific game to be transferred to after the execution of the jackpot game after winning a V prize.

FIG. 11(C) shows an example of a losing symbol lottery table. The winning symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery is "losing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above regarding the first special symbol. It is the same as the table, but the second special symbol is a different method.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the winning symbol lottery table is the first special symbol. Only in this case, a lottery process is performed and either "miss 1" or "miss 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "miss 2" symbol is a missed symbol that has a probability of winning approximately 6.4% when the first special symbol is a miss, and if "miss 2" is won, it is likely to become a reach in the fluctuating pattern lottery. It is configured to make it easier to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to a special lottery table (not shown). For this reason, the "missing 2" is sometimes referred to as a "missing reach symbol."

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise does not have a losing symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and a losing symbol of 1 is determined no matter what the random symbol number is. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and it is configured to memorize the losing symbol of 1. It should be noted that a lottery table in which one symbol always wins may be used, and a configuration may be made such that a missed symbol wins.

(Fluctuating pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of determining by lottery the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol lottery as the performance time necessary for the performance display device P80 to notify whether there is a jackpot or not, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. A process is performed to determine the variable display time of , using a variation pattern table described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/medium low base) and a low base state (non-electronic chew support state), that is, in a pachinko game machine P based on the premise, a game ball is fired to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the ``Low Base Medium Variation Pattern Lottery Table'' in a state where it is recommended.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variable pattern lottery, and the "variable pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. A representative example of the manner in which fluctuations are produced is shown. "Variation time" is the variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variation pattern lottery (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed.

In Figure 12, "1 variation" to "4 variation" indicate the number of reservations in situations where the special symbol lottery execution conditions are met, and the winning lottery result is "lost" and the target special symbol (here In this case, when there are N reserved balls of the first special symbol), a variable pattern lottery is executed using the variable pattern table of "Hold N Variation". That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to use different variation pattern tables depending on the number of reservations. In addition, if a game ball enters the starting prize opening in a state where there is no hold, it will be temporarily stored as a hold in the process, so a variable pattern lottery will be executed using the change pattern table of "1st change". Ru.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. Although it is not shown, if the result of the symbol lottery is determined to be "missing 2 (a symbol that is out of reach)", even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of reservations. It is configured to perform a variable pattern lottery using a pattern table (variable pattern table for losing 2).

“10R Probable Variable”, “5R Probable Variable”, “10R Normal”, and “5R Normal” in FIG. 12 indicate the variation pattern table used for the variation pattern lottery at the time of jackpot in the low base state, and the winning/failure lottery results. represents a "big hit", and a lottery is performed by selecting an appropriate variable pattern table depending on which symbol is the symbol lottery result. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main character of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed in a manner that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also , there may be multiple patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described using FIG. 12. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation pattern random number is "30000", and the number of reserved balls at the start of variation is 3 (the number of reserved balls is 2 after the start of variation). We will explain the winning/failure lottery results and the situation where the winning symbol lottery results in "loss 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", a fluctuation pattern table of "hold 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process is similar to the lottery process in the win/fail lottery described above, and a comparison operation (subtraction) is performed between the fluctuating pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the fluctuating pattern ID of each lottery result, and it is determined whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison calculation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, and the special After a 7-second variable display is performed as a variable display of symbols, a missed symbol 1 will be displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. 13. The structure of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. 12, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure depends on the number of reservations for the second special symbol. The table is configured to have a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. Note that although FIGS. 12 and 13 are structured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation; It is also possible to configure the variation patterns to have only a small number of overlaps, or to have no overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery results of the second special symbol "Hold 3 fluctuation" and "Hold 4 fluctuation" in the case of a miss will be the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed. The configuration is such that a 2-second fluctuation (fluctuation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Furthermore, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the 10 second fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a 10-second variation is that the player's profit in the event of a jackpot is large (the expected value of the balls obtained is high due to the large number of execution rounds) in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in Figure 11. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to a probability variable state as a specific game state), and by giving priority to and performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special symbol, it is possible to create a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to make it possible to obtain. In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the advantageous degree of the jackpot game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is It is easy to avoid displaying fluctuations, and it is easy to maintain the hold that was established in the normal gaming state (low base state) until the end of the specific gaming state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, and the second Another purpose is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to generate the reservation of the first special symbol in a low base state compared to the amount of game balls used to generate the reservation of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, and represents a special fluctuation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of the special fluctuation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P, three periods of special fluctuation pattern tables are comprehensively shown.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st change to the 4th change after a jackpot (a jackpot is achieved with 4 reservations that exist at the time of a jackpot, so-called "retention series" (retention in the reservation)) The "on-hold consecutive winning table" (targets IDs "51" and "71") that is referred to in the period) and the reach fluctuation that is referred to from the nth to mth fluctuation after the jackpot and is 55 seconds are likely to be selected. It is referenced in the high frequency reach table (targeting IDs "52", "53", "54", and "72") and the last fluctuation display of the high base state, and is mainly used to execute the "result effect" described below. It is shown that the ``result variation table'' (targeting IDs ``55'' and ``73'') is provided in the assumed Pachinko gaming machine P.

A special fluctuation pattern table that is referred to in a limited period in this way is referred to as a "special fluctuation pattern table" or "limited frequency (pattern table)."

The pachinko game machine P based on the premise is configured such that the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referenced during a predetermined period after a jackpot game (the activation of a special electric accessory, in other words, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol). It is also possible to configure them to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table to refer to in any situation can be set appropriately for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the example shown, but the details should be explained in a separate description if necessary. shall be.

Next, the control of the performance control board P41 that controls the performance operation in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. In addition, the operation control of the performance control board P41 has fewer restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. The present invention is not limited to only the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board ~ Main loop processing]
In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, when the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the performance control board P41. Here, details of the power-on process of the production control board P41 will be explained with reference to FIG. 15.

When power-on processing (step 4000) is started in the production control board P41 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, initial setting processing related to the operation of the CPU, which is a calculation device provided on the production control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to make the necessary settings for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and although the details are omitted, regarding the performance that was being executed when the power was cut off last time, the settings on the main control board P40. Since there is a time difference between the completion of the power-on process (Fig. 7) and the power-on process of the production control board (Fig. 15), if the production returns to the one before the power cut after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 and Because there is a possibility that deviations may occur, in the initial processing when the performance control board P41 recovers from a power outage, the performance information etc. are often initialized so that the performance that was being executed before the power outage will not be executed. (referred to as "control board reset" or "sub-reset").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the pachinko game machine P that is assumed, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the period (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set to 1 so that the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the performance control board P41, first, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process (step 4006) is performed to update the performance control random number data, and various performance control random numbers to be used when an opportunity to execute the performance lottery occurs.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise is designed to monitor the input port even during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41, which will be described later, but the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is a 16 ms cycle monitoring process. Therefore, monitoring is limited to inputs such as switches, which are monitoring targets necessary for the system, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for performance control of the performance movable accessory P560 is omitted. In addition, as a modification, regarding the sensors that should be monitored for performance purposes, confirmation may be performed in the input port monitoring process within the main loop process.

Similar to the main control board's input port confirmation process, the input port monitoring process includes generating and storing level data from input data from various sensors, and storing rising (falling) data. be done.

Subsequently, the production control board P41 performs production device control processing (step 4010) and executes control regarding production operations other than the production display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, etc. A performance operation command corresponding to the performance content determined to be executed by processing such as a performance control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each performance device to cause the performance device to execute the performance operation.

This is because the output of performance operation commands to various performance devices in the performance device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the performance image displayed on the performance display device P80 (image display device). , the reception of a signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the performance display device P80 to the performance control board P41, or a signal for forced synchronization (the input port monitoring process described above) (reception)), synchronization with the performance switching timing of the performance display device P80 is achieved, and performance operation commands are outputted to various performance devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the performance movable accessory P560 of the performance device, since the drive means of the performance movable accessory P560 needs to be controlled in a shorter cycle, the performance set in this process is Regarding the operation pattern of the performance movable accessory P560 to be executed in accordance with the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are also executed during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 (see FIG. 16), which will be described later.

Next, the production control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the production control board P41 will be explained. The performance control process includes flags established based on the results of analyzing the performance control command received from the main control board P40 in the performance control command analysis process described later, and information on the received performance control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), and other processing, based on flags established during other processing, to determine the content of the production to be executed by various production devices by drawing or selecting. It is.

The performance control process selects a performance determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes a corresponding submodule process for performance determination. As an example of the production contents determined here, a process of determining a variation production corresponding to one variation of the special symbol based on commands related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) (Processing that determines the content of notices, reach, decorative symbols to stop, etc.), and pre-reading effects for newly generated holds based on the number of holds and advance judgment information that are sent when a hold occurs Pre-read lottery processing that determines whether or not to execute a special game (also called "pre-determined performance"), and determines the content of the performance during a special game based on information sent as a performance control command when executing a special game (big hit or small win) There is a special game performance content determination process.

In addition, the production control processing includes not only processing for production control commands sent from the main control board P40, but also processing for determining error display contents when an error is detected on the production control board P41 (error display sent from the main control board P41). (including determination processing of error display contents based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on input operations by the player using the performance operation means P81 such as the performance button P381 and cross key P383, and the adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of performance contents, such as light intensity adjustment to change the luminance of light emitted from the display, and customization of performance contents and performance content determination trends.

Furthermore, since specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used for the determination processing of various performance contents performed in the submodule processing called in the performance control processing, the explanation is omitted and is the subject of the invention. When a characteristic process is executed in the pachinko game machine P, the details will be explained in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P that is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the explanation of the main loop processing of the production control board, production control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be explained as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The performance control command analysis process is based on information stored as a performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and analyzes information corresponding to the performance control command to be used for determining the content of the performance in the performance control process described above. memory and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command sent from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data, which are the production control commands, and then according to the production control command. The specified processing is executed.

Note that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be sent every time the main control board P40 interrupts processing (every 4ms), so in the Pachinko gaming machine P that is assumed, the performance control command is Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the board P41 has elapsed, analysis of the production control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the production control board P41 will be explained. The interrupt process in the production control board P41 is different from the interrupt process in the main control board, and includes a plurality of interrupt processes that are started at different execution timings (see FIGS. 16(A) and (B)). Note that priorities are set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process will be executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. controlled by. In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be representatively explained.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
The production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) is an interrupt process that is executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the production control board P41.

The port input/output process (step 5002) is the input of the sensor provided for detecting the position of the performance movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the performance operation means P81) from the input port of the performance control board P41. From the process of generating and storing level data and rise data, and from the output port, driving the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the performance movable accessory P560 according to the operation pattern set in the performance device control process. Processing to output a signal is executed. Furthermore, when data is output from the output port, data in a counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer that measures the switching timing of performance operations. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison calculation is performed with the comparison value, it is determined whether or not a switching condition for the production operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the production is used in the production control process (step 4012). Performs processing to store the flag in the storage area.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) uses the sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to collect sensor detection information related to the switching of the performance operation, such as whether the performance operation switching condition of the performance movable accessory P560 is satisfied. It is determined whether or not this has occurred, and a process is performed to switch the table of motion patterns, and a process is performed to set a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control process (step 4012).

The production button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process of determining whether or not a production switching condition is satisfied based on inputs from the production button P381, lever P382, cross key P383, etc., which are production operation means P81. In the production button monitoring process, production is performed based on the level data and rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF to ON this time) that indicates the input status of each input device generated in the port input/output processing (step 5002). It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the mode of operation.

For example, if rising data is generated as input information to the production operation means P81, it is assumed that there has been a player operation on the production operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding production is stored. . Note that if the input is judged only based on the rising data, there is a possibility that electrical noise will cause false detection and switching of the performance operation, so it is necessary to input level data (on data) multiple times after the rising data is generated. It may be determined that a player's operation (sometimes expressed as a "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") is performed on the performance operation means P81 based on the successive operations.

In addition, if the level data of ON input is detected 500 times in a row, that is, if it is determined that the production operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that it is a "long press (long press)" operation, It is configured to be treated as a special operation. In addition, falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the current off) may be detected as electrical noise when determining whether or not to continue the "long press" operation. In this case, as well as the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detecting falling data, input of "long press (long press)" operation is performed based on the detection of multiple inputs of level data (off data). It may also be used to determine termination.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, depending on the content of the performance being executed, the performance operation means can be activated once every fixed period (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by performing a "long press" operation on the performance button P381. It is possible to repeatedly perform a process that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on page 81, and in this way, when a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation is triggered, The process of repeatedly executing a process by assuming that a "single press" operation has been performed is called an "auto multiple press" operation. In addition, the "auto continuous hit" operation is not limited to the exemplified operation contents, but can also be performed by simultaneously operating multiple production operation means P81, or by turning on and off a dip switch provided as a switch different from the production button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is assumed that the "auto continuous hit" operation has been executed based on the input of the production button P381.

Note that, depending on the execution status of the performance, input to the performance operation means P81 has a period of time treated as a valid operation ("operation valid period") and a period of time treated as an invalid operation ("operation invalid period").

The multitasking process (step 5010) is based on the value of the task counter (updated between values "0" and "15"), which is updated every time the production control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process that differs in the content of the process executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is executed approximately in synchronization with one cycle of main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, it is determined whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed based on a signal sent from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input/output processing), and A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 in order to display an image according to the effect determined in the effect control process P41. This is the process of transmitting the image control board P42 to the CPU of the image control board P42. In addition, although the image control board P42 and the effect control board P41 may be comprised by the same board|substrate, it is described as the image control board P42 in this specification for convenience.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the production control board P41 configures the image control commands into a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying the pattern of the display content, and sends them to the image control board P42. It is configured to send.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise is configured to transmit image control commands in the production control timer interrupt processing, but there is a separate procedure for transmitting and receiving commands between the production control board P41 and the image control board P42. It is also possible to configure so that transmission and reception can be performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) during the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is sent to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that is generated when P41 is received.

When the production control board P41 starts the production control command reception interrupt, it reads the production control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether reception of one effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). In addition, in the production control command transmitted from the main control board P40, specific bits of 1-byte data are composed of "1" and "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, the process of storing the content of the currently received production control command in the lower 1-byte storage area is normally performed. At this time, if a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the current temporary buffer data storage area indicates MODE data before updating, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After that, the currently received EVENT data is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

In determining the completion of reception of the production control command in step 5506, it is determined whether a specific bit of the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In this case, the reception of the first production control command is completed (step 5506 YES) and the process proceeds to the next step. If it is determined that the reception is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until a strobe signal based on is received, exit the production control command reception interrupt, perform other processing, and wait.

In step 5506, when it is determined that the reception of the production control command is completed, it is determined whether the sent production control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether matching data exists in the list data of production control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. If it is determined that it is a normal command, it is stored in a storage area for storing the received performance control command so as to be analyzed in the performance control command analysis process during the performance control timer interrupt process, If the data is abnormal, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic performance in the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the symbol variation display (during the stop display of decorative symbols) during a normal game (low probability/low base), and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). This is a diagram.

(Example of display in normal game mode) 《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during stop display of decorative symbols) during a normal game (low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that is clearly visible to the player. These three designs are called "decorative designs (P801)" (also called "decorative designs"), and are decorative displays that are displayed in response to the results of the special design lottery. The display changes depending on the display. Although the numbers are expressed only in numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, in the case where each number is displayed with a decorative image, the display mode of the decorative image and each number may be changed depending on the game state. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to determine the current gaming state.

The decorative pattern P801 is displayed in a variable manner as one performance for each special pattern variable display (one special symbol lottery), except when a special performance is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is displayed in a high-speed variable manner (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and " A performance called "notice" is performed to heighten the expectation of acquiring the right to the jackpot game.

The decorative patterns P801 shown in FIG. 17 are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display starts, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) are displayed. For each symbol row, the stop display symbols determined by the production control board P41 are stopped and displayed. Generally, when three decorative patterns P801 are stopped and displayed in the same manner (in a row), it is visually announced that a jackpot has been won. In addition, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol P801b, which is the symbol to stop last (also referred to as the "final stop symbol"), stops. The state in which the right and right symbols are displayed as the same symbol (temporarily stopped display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The fluctuating display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the manner in which the fluctuating display is not limited to the vertical direction, but also in the horizontal direction and depth, It may be possible to perform a scrolling display operation in the (diagonal) direction, or it may be possible to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to sequentially switch and display the display.

Further, the decorative pattern P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one variable display of the special pattern. At this time, when the stop display is displayed multiple times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display that is displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. A stop display at a timing other than that is referred to as a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, in order to distinguish it from the final pattern stop display (main stop), the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed, but is temporarily stopped to the extent that it cannot be recognized as fixed. It is configured to be able to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around a single rotation axis. In addition to temporary stoppage, such a state is sometimes expressed as "shaking fluctuation."

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may repeat the fluctuation display again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo fluctuation (pseudo series)" effect. , A re-variation in which the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol has stopped is called a "promotion (variation)" performance. In addition, when performing the promotion performance, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or to not change to a losing symbol.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a type of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal fluctuating display and is displayed only when executing some effects, and this is called "special decoration pattern". (P804)" (special symbol). Each special design has a meaning, for example, it suggests that a specific jackpot will be executed, it suggests that the above-mentioned pseudo-variable effect will be performed, or it indicates a specific reach effect (reach mode). Examples include things that suggest that a preview effect (not shown) will be executed. When using a special symbol, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or a single symbol that substitutes for all of the left symbol P801a, middle symbol P801b, and right symbol P801c may be used. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
At the top right of the screen, three numbers are displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801. This design is also called a "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design in accordance with the fluctuating display of the special design. Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) differs from the "decorative design" in that even if a special effect is performed in which the decorative design P801 does not stop and display, the special design indicating the result of the special lottery is a special design. In line with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, a stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simplified drawing P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 becomes a ready-to-reach mode, or may be configured to notify the result of a special symbol lottery. In order to achieve the minimum objective, even if a simple method of variable display is adopted, such as constant display switching of the special symbol until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a stopped display state, regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Hold display area》
A reservation display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. 17 . In the reservation display area P810, a reservation object P811 corresponding to a reservation (random value) corresponding to an unexercised right is displayed as a special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example in FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the earlier the reservation occurs), the closer to the center of the lower screen the display is, and the reservation display area P810 The display position of the held object located on the rightmost side is called "Hold 1 (display area)", and as you move towards the left side of the screen, "Hold 2 (display area)", "Hold 3 (display area)", and "Hold 4 ( display area).

Further, near the right side of the pending display area P810, an object having substantially the same aspect as the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and in a larger size than the pending object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number that triggered the start of the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is referred to as the "variable object display area (P812)". . Further, the object displayed in the relevant variable object display area P812 is called the "relevant variable object (P813)", but may also be referred to as the "relevant pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. For this reason, we use the acronym "applicable."

Note that the display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not need to be configured completely the same as that of the pending object P811, and the pending display that is present upon the start of variation is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (not be displayed). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can change in the same way as the pending display in the pending change lookahead described below (for example, the shape or color of the object changes at a timing in the middle of the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
On the left side of the screen, at approximately the center in the height direction, two numbers are displayed vertically side by side. These two numbers represent the current number of reservations for the first special symbol and the number of reservations for the second special symbol, and are called a "simple reservation display" (P814). In the example in Figure 17, the number of reservations for the first special symbol is indicated by the number "3" displayed at the top, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is indicated by the number "4" displayed at the bottom. .

(Pre-reading performance)
《Pending change lookahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the pending object P811 in the 3rd display area in the 3rd reserve display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the pending object P811 in the 2nd and 1st display areas. The pachinko game machine P based on the premise is configured such that the display mode of the pending object P811 of the third bet is more likely to result in a jackpot than the display mode of the pending object P811 of the second match. In this way, the effect of changing and displaying the display mode of the pending object P811 for a specific pending is called "holding change (pre-reading)".

In addition, it is configured so that it has not only the mode illustrated in FIG. 17 but also multiple types of change modes, and the probability (expectation level) of becoming a jackpot can be different for each of them, and the pending object P811 is changed in stages. The display mode may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "holding change (prereading)", if a random value stored as a hold is determined to be the target of execution of the effect, a variable display corresponding to the hold that is the target of the execution of the effect will start. A performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of becoming a jackpot for the pending performance that is the target of the performance is called a ``pre-reading performance'' (sometimes referred to as a ``pre-judgment performance''). I'm here.

When performing a "pre-reading effect," the hold that is determined as the target of the effect may be referred to as a "pre-reading target hold," a "trigger hold," a "culprit hold," etc. , The variable display of the special symbol based on the prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation," "trigger variation," "culprit variation," etc.

Here, some typical examples of "pre-read effects" that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise are illustrated.

《Looking ahead to opportunities》
"Opportunity read ahead" is a stop display of the decorative pattern P801 according to a predetermined rule in the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern P801 until the change of the look-ahead target fluctuation starts (or a temporary stop display) This is a performance that will be performed. As an example of the rules for the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as a chance item, (a) when a miss pattern is stopped and displayed by a combination of only the patterns with the same hue in the numerical part of the decorative pattern, (b) When decorative patterns such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode, such as in order (normal order, reverse order order), etc. (c) A case where a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from a number such as "first" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Pre-reading of staged movable characters》
"Production movable accessory pre-reading" is to pre-read the production movable accessory P560 or frame movable accessory P360 (lever P382 of the pachinko game machine P1 etc. which is based on the premise) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is a performance in which a lively movement is performed according to a performance operation pattern from the start of the change, spanning the change until the start of the change display of the target change or the pre-read target change.

《Zone transition look ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variation display of the special symbol before the start of the look-ahead target variation, and waits until the variation display becomes the look-ahead target variation. This is a look-ahead performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot by executing a preview lottery to execute a preview performance that corresponds to a performance mode. For example, "display the normal background → display the background during pre-reading → jackpot" or "display the normal background → display the background during pre-reading → lose the symbol stops and return to the normal background".

(Example of display when performing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot is being performed. As mentioned above, "reach effect" is a situation where the decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than the first decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and there is one more symbol. It refers to a performance in which it is announced that if the game stops in the same manner, it will be a jackpot.

In most cases, the pachinko game machine P on which this game is based is designed to notify a jackpot by displaying three decorative symbols P801 in the same stationary display mode via a ready-to-reach effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols in the changing middle symbol row. This is a situation where the "4" symbol vibrates violently and if it switches to "5", it will be a jackpot.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display in FIG. 17, and the middle symbol during the variable display is displayed smaller. The decorative pattern P801b in the row is displayed larger and highlighted than the decorative pattern P801 when the display is stopped. The decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be called a "retreat symbol (P803)" or a "reach symbol". In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is announced whether or not there will be a jackpot depending on the ending of the animation of the preview effect (reach effect) that is displayed along with the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and right symbol P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803, thereby increasing the visibility of the performance that the player wants to draw attention to. ing.

Furthermore, gaming machines that do not display three decorative symbols P801 are also known, and there are also multi-line reach modes that simultaneously form multiple rows of reach modes, but detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-reach effect, there is a ready-to-reach effect called a "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. The standard for reach production is ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than the first decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and if one more symbol stops in the same manner, it will be announced that it will be a jackpot''. Although the situation is different, a full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, a "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function that adjusts the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light intensity adjustment function that adjusts the luminance of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of a performance mode change function that changes the type of preview performance that is called and changes the frequency of occurrence of the preview performance.

The production setting display area P850 is not displayed all the time, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs operations related to the various production settings (volume adjustment function, light intensity adjustment function, production mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18. In the situation shown in FIG. 18, if the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the diagram) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to "3". It is now changing to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, when adjusting the light intensity, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the production mode change function is configured such that the change operation is performed according to the operation of the production button. An example is where the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes depending on the execution of the effect during the game, and methods other than the exemplified setting change method can be adopted as appropriate.

Furthermore, regarding the display of the performance setting display area P850 and the use of various performance setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's performance setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalidated, so that particularly important performances can be set. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the various effect setting functions are disabled.

(Example of performance display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, the display mode of the performance in a state where a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko game machine P will be explained.

《Display showing the type of jackpot》
At the lower left and upper right of the screen in FIG. 19, a decorative pattern P801 that triggers the execution of the jackpot game is displayed. The bottom left of the screen displays the decorative pattern P801 (also referred to as "Jackpot design (P805)") in a smaller display format than the decorative pattern currently being displayed, and the top right of the screen. continues to display the simplified installation drawing P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols ended.

In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of decorative pattern P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). It visually suggests the level of expectation and the gaming state after the jackpot (normal gaming state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns that trigger the jackpot (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802), it is possible to know the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be obtained even during a jackpot game. It is possible to make suggestions.

In addition, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 resembling a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "Round display (P820)"), and the icon The characters "MAX" are written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure indicates the jackpot indicated by the character string "MAX", and indicates that the maximum round jackpot game of the pachinko game machine P is to be executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or "consecutive game (display) icon," and each time a specific game state and a jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the number of icons displayed increases in a cumulative manner. This is an effect display that informs the player how many times and what type of jackpot has been won in a state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, in the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, "〇〇Bonus!'' (notifying the maximum round jackpot) and the By displaying a message such as "△△chance" (suggesting a jackpot other than the maximum round), an effect is executed to notify the player of the type of jackpot.

For example, even if it is suggested that it is a jackpot such as "△△chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot will be displayed as "Extra Bonus! +〇 Round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" that notifies the user that the jackpot is the maximum round.

In addition, "jackpot promotion effect" is also used to suggest that a jackpot game is being executed that will transition to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot announced earlier. Sometimes. For example, from a jackpot game (referred to as a "non-probable jackpot" or "regular jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after a jackpot game, to a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after a jackpot ("non-probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot"), An example of an effect display is that the effect display switches to an effect called ``probable strange jackpot'' or ``specific jackpot''.

《Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game》
Next, when executing the jackpot game, an explanation will be given regarding the performance display that shows the progress of the jackpot game. In FIG. 19, as a performance indicating a jackpot performance display, "Round display (P820)" is executed with the character string "ROUND_〇" displayed at the top left of the screen, and a character string "TOTAL_〇〇pt" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. Examples include "Display number of pitches acquired (P822)" which is executed in , and "Count display (P825)" which is displayed by 10 circular image objects approximately in the center on the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called a "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) is being executed during the jackpot game. The numerical value to the right of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game starts. The example in FIG. 19 shows a situation where the sixth round game is being executed.

Note that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the number of rounds executed during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the above-mentioned "small win V", the period during the small win game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the jackpot game executed after winning the V prize may be treated as the second round. In addition, in another example, if the opening pattern of the big winning hole P751 in a round game ends with a transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the big winning hole P751 is closed. There may be a case where a round that has been substantially executed is treated as a "substantially round" only when the open pattern of the ball is in an easy-to-enter state for a long time.

《Number of balls acquired》
"Display number of balls acquired (P822)" is the same as "Display number of balls acquired in jackpot (P823 *not shown)" which displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in one jackpot game being executed, and a specific game. There is a type called ``cumulative acquired ball count display (824)'' that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a ``cumulative number of acquired pitches display (P824)'' which is a five-digit number of acquired pitches is displayed. Note that the "display of the number of jackpot balls obtained (P823)" and the "display of the cumulative number of balls obtained (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, the "number of balls won display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the jackpot game. However, as a target for accumulating prize ball payouts in the acquired ball count display P822, payouts based on balls entered into the general winning hole P731 and the second starting winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. It's okay.

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "Number of pitches acquired (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "Display of the number of pitches acquired (P822)" The addition period for the cumulative number of paid out prize balls may be extended not only during jackpot games, but also during specific games or small win games.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P used as the premise, in addition to the "number of balls acquired" display (P822), the cumulative number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations, such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to perform a ``display of the number of pitches acquired at intervals'' that emphatically notifies the player in addition to the ``display of the number of pitches acquired'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many balls can be entered before the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the grand prize opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in the current round game. This is a display indicating whether a ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two rows of objects at approximately the center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example in Figure 19, for the 6th round of the game, 5 balls have already entered the grand prize opening (indicated by the white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (indicated by the shaded circular object). display) is indicated by count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to the initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, depending on the falling situation of the game balls, the number of game balls that meet the closing conditions of the big winning hole P751 will be consecutively equal to or higher than the closing conditions of the big winning hole P751. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over-win" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, a special light is emitted from the effect lamp P82, and a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify by Further, regarding the above-mentioned acquired ball number display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings that are "over-winning" may be included in the addition, or may be excluded from the addition.

《Other effects displayed during jackpot games》
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be explained.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative pattern at the bottom left of the screen (Jackpot design P805) is the "Selected song display (P854)" which shows the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, the player can arbitrarily select a song to play by operating the production button P381 or cross key P383 during the first or second round during a jackpot game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected song display P854, if the song can be changed, as shown in FIG. 20, an image displaying "Can be changed using the (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected song display P854.

In addition, the selection of production during such a jackpot game is not limited to music selection, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during a specific game after the jackpot game (collectively referred to as (referred to as "performance customization display (P853)"), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified installation diagram P802 at the top right of the screen are image displays related to "Right shot notification (P830)" (also called "Recommended firing position notification" etc.) It is. In the pachinko game machine P based on the premise, during a jackpot game, the game state is such that it is recommended to fire the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area, so the "Right hit notification (P832)" ("Right hit") is activated. string, and the display of the arrow symbol to the right) is being executed.

The "split notification" may be displayed not only during a jackpot game but also during a game in a specific game state or during a game in a normal game state. In particular, in situations where the gaming state changes (occurrence/end of a jackpot or occurrence/end of a specific gaming state), the display is displayed in a larger size so that it is easier for the player to recognize it than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19. By temporarily displaying in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

In addition, in "Bulking division notification (P830)", the image that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the game state transition is called "1st punching division notification image" ("Right hit large display (P831)", " ``Left hit large display (P833)'', and during jackpot games or specific game states, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. "Notification image" ("right-hand small display (P832)", "left-hand small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "Bullet notification (P830)", if a situation where a game ball is fired at a position other than the recommended firing position is detected, for example, during a jackpot, the left side area of the game area "Left-handed hit warning notification" ("right-handed hit warning notification (P835)") that alerts the player that when a game ball is fired at P501L, the game ball should be fired at the right side area P501R of the gaming area. ) to display a message such as "Please hit right." Note that in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are reversed, a "right-handed hitting warning notification" ("left-handed hitting alert notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but we will omit explanations of those that have been explained in the previous explanation, and will include effects that have not been explained so far, as well as differences from the above explanation. An explanation will be given regarding the effect display having the following.

First, as a performance display that has not been explained so far, the "performance mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained as an explanation regarding the performance display during a specific game state.

《Production mode display》
"Production mode display (P840)" is a display that shows the current state of the production display mode, and is a display that shows that a preview production according to the corresponding mode is selected based on status information called production mode. . When the production mode display is different, the type of preview production that is visible to the player is generally created so that the visual impression it gives is significantly different, although there are some preview productions that share some common preview effects. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the assumed gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (number of times cut probability variable)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

In addition to notifying the performance mode in a specific game state, the "performance mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), or may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state). When a state has a plurality of performance modes, the display may be performed temporarily each time a condition for switching the performance mode is satisfied, or may be displayed continuously until the performance mode ends.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner until the end of a specific game state (the number of special symbol drawings), or the number of times the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner until the current production mode ends. This is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, "56 remaining" is displayed at the top center of the screen, indicating that the "ST (number of times cut probability variable)" game state will continue until 56 special symbol drawings are executed. The person is notified.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the effect display examples in the other game states described above will be explained.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
In the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of a decorative pattern P801 is displayed. Compared to the decorative pattern P801 in the performance display example in the normal game state of FIG. 20, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the performance display example of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state in FIG.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, a performance mode display P840, a remaining number of games display P841, and a jackpot icon display P821 are performed at the top of the screen as a performance display for a specific game state, and a selected song is displayed at the bottom of the screen. P854 and number of pitches acquired P824 are displayed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed, so if the decorative pattern P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal game state, the stop display In this case, the display of some symbols overlaps with a portion of each display, which may cause a problem in which the visibility of the stop display symbols decreases. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is less likely to occur. Further, as an example of displaying the decorative pattern P801 in a simplified manner, in addition to reducing the size, it is also possible to adopt a method of not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Pending display area (specific gaming state)》
In the pachinko gaming machine P based on the premise, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. 20, the display of the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 of the specific game state changes from "Hold 1" to "Hold 1" in the depth direction from the front side of the screen. A display area for pending objects of ``Hold 4'' is provided. Note that the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is not displayed in the "RUSH_MODE" production mode state.

When the fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new fluctuation starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the pending object P811 lined up at the back moves to the front. The display is controlled to be larger.

Further, although not shown, a "result display effect" which is an important effect displayed during a specific game will be explained.

《Result display performance》
In the Pachinko gaming machine P that is based on the premise, "result display performance" is mainly used when the last change in a specific gaming state (high base state) is executed, or when a hold that occurred during a specific gaming state is no longer held, etc. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the "consecutive game" state has ended, and in the so-called "consecutive game" state, information on how many jackpot games have been won and how many game balls were fired in total are displayed. This is an effect that informs the player whether the ball has been acquired (equivalent to displaying the number of acquired balls).

[First example]
The pachinko game machine P of the first embodiment has various characteristic structures in addition to having the above-mentioned underlying technology as its basic structure. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the underlying technology, and omit the explanation of common points. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements explained in the basic technology will be described with the same reference numerals.

(Description of the housing (slot machine 1))
Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 21 shows an external appearance of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 can be roughly divided into the front panel 2 side and the cabinet 3 side with necessary parts and boards attached respectively. The front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and the side surfaces of the cabinet 3 are connected by a hinge device and a locking device, and when a lock key is inserted into the locking device provided on the front panel 2 and rotated in a specific direction, The locking device side can be left open.

The components on the front panel 2 side of the slot machine 1 will be explained below.

(Front panel 2)
The front panel 2 is composed of a plate member with a design, and on the front side (on the player side) there is a display window 4, an operation instruction lamp 24, a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, and an acquired number display 27. , an operation panel 11, a lower panel 5, upper or both side display lamps, etc. are provided, and on the back side, a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board unit 42, A setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a setting value display LED, setting display, setting value display, setting display device, or setting value display device) is provided on various boards and the like.

(Display window 4)
The display window 4 is printed on the outer circumferential surface of the reel tape fixed to each reel rim of the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c, which are provided so as to be rotatable in the vertical direction when the front panel 2 is closed. The displayed symbols are configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). When the reels are stopped, 3 consecutive symbols out of 21 (21 in this embodiment, but you may freely design 20, 16, etc. depending on the specifications) Two patterns are visible. That is, a total of 9 symbols (3 [symbols] x 3 [reels]) are stopped on the display window 4. Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowermost stop position is the lower stage. shall be.

(effective line)
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c stop. The active line in this embodiment is constituted by a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel in the display window 4. When it is determined by the winning determination process that the symbol combination that has stopped on the activated line corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the process that corresponds to the symbol combination that has stopped is performed. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell has stopped, the payout process of game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and credit addition process are executed, and the replay When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to has stopped, automatic bet processing is executed.

Also, depending on the slot machine 1, the effective lines may be set as five lines: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward line to the right, and a downward line to the right. Upper row, right reel 8c lower row), approximately valley-shaped (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c upper row), approximately L-shaped (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c lower row). The slot machine 1 can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine 1, such as setting six lines or more, or setting the effective line to change depending on the number of bets. Furthermore, a straight line other than the valid line may be referred to as an invalid line.

(Operation instruction lamp 24)
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit, the left stop switch 13a is turned on, when the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit, the middle stop switch 13b is turned on, and when the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit, the right stop switch 13c is turned on. Indicates that each operation should be performed.

(Number of bets display lamp 25)
The bet number (bet number) display lamp 25 is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets operated by the player. It also includes a 1 bet number display lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet number display lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet number display lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the one bet number display lamp 25a lights up, when a total of two medals are bet, the two bet number display lamp 25b lights up, and when a total of three medals are bet, three medals are bet. The number display lamp 25c is turned on. Although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay won is turned on. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. Note that the lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or it may be configured such that either one is lit first.

(Number of credits display 26)
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a segment display 26a (not shown), which mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It mainly consists of a segment display 26b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the number of credits, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). Note that the number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine 1. Further, when an error is detected and the normal game cannot proceed, a display regarding the error may be displayed.

(Number of acquired coins display 27)
The acquisition number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a segment display 27a (not shown) that mainly displays the upper digits of the acquisition number, which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP); It mainly consists of a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired coins, which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). Note that the number of medals acquired means the number of medals paid out to the player in the slot machine 1 according to the result of the game (including the number stored in the credit number display 26). Further, when an error is detected and the normal game cannot proceed, a display regarding the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display information on the segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27c, and also display information regarding the number of credits and the number of acquired coins depending on whether the DP is lit or not. It is also possible to display different information. For example, information indicating that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section (described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment indicators. Can be mentioned. Further, it may have the ability to notify the pressing order using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27. When the obtained number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the obtained number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

(Operation panel 11)
The operation panel 11 is provided approximately at the center of the front panel 2. The operation panel 11 is configured approximately horizontally, and includes a start switch 12, a stop switch 13, a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, and a sub cross key, which will be described later. A switch 21, an eject switch 22, and a payment switch (described later) are provided.

(Start switch 12)
The start switch 12 (also referred to as a start lever) is provided on the operation panel 11. It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and when it is not operated, the start switch sensor is ON, and when it is operated, the start switch sensor is turned OFF, so that it is determined that the start switch has been operated. The start switch 12 becomes valid when the number of coins bet reaches a specified number, and when operated, starts an internal lottery process (described later), an AT lottery process (described later), a reel rotation process (described later), etc. In addition, in this embodiment, the input signal is made low active, so if the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is operated, the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF. When this happens, the start switch input signal is turned ON. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the start switch input signal is turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, when we simply say "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated", it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what has become.

(stop switch 13)
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left reel 8a corresponds to the left stop switch 13a, the middle reel 8b corresponds to the middle stop switch 13b, and the right reel 8c corresponds to the right stop switch 13c. Furthermore, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it is suggested that the stop switch 13 is effective by changing the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red.

(Medal slot 17)
The medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Although a plurality of types of medal slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, the mounting standards for the various medal slots 17 are determined so that the various medal slots 17 can be commonly attached to the operation panel 11. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game medium is not limited to the input of medals as described above, but may include, for example, input of game balls used in pachinko (so-called parrot), or input of game media stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory. In some games, the game machine reads the information on the number of game media stored in the electronic storage medium, and updates and saves the information on the number of game media stored in the electrical storage medium at the timing of setting the number of bets and paying out winnings. obtain.

(Bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19))
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credit, a process for setting the number of bets is performed, which is equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal slot 17 (bet number setting means 158). However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no stored medals in the credits, it will be invalidated (will not be accepted). It also consists of a MAX bet switch 18 that allows you to bet the maximum number of coins set for each slot machine 1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows you to bet one coin, and the 1 bet switch 19 cannot be operated multiple times. The system is configured such that it is possible to bet the same number of coins as the number of operations within the maximum bet amount. Furthermore, if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated while the maximum number of game media is bet, the state may shift to a state in which 1 coin is bet, or the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 may be disabled (1 coin is bet). may not shift to the bet state). Note that the maximum number of bets in this embodiment is three. Note that the maximum bet number may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned bet switch, it is also possible to provide an n-bet switch that allows an arbitrarily set number of n (n is a positive integer) bets to be made in one operation. Furthermore, if the currently set bet number is 3, the MAX bet switch 18 is invalidated (will not be accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated. Also, when the number of medals stored in the current credit and the number of bets currently set are less than 3, and the sum of the number of medals stored in the current credit and the number of bets currently set is less than 3. is invalidated (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated, or a number that can be set as the bet number is set as the bet number.

(Sub switch 20)
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11. This is a switch that is operated mainly according to an instruction screen displayed on a display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20 as an input means, the sub-cross key switch 21 (sub-cross key upper switch, sub-cross key lower switch, sub-cross key left switch, sub-cross key right switch) and production switch (instructions during the game) can be used as input means. A switch that can be operated using the Further, the sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a mobile terminal, which will be described later. Although the sub-switch 20 is used for the menu display function and the production switch is used for operation during the game, they may be used as a common switch.

(Payment switch)
The payment switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after the game ends, it executes a process of paying out (settling) the number of game media bet on and the number of game media stored in credits to the player. In addition. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been placed and game media are stored in credits, the betted game media are paid out first and then stored in credits. Although the system is configured to pay out game media stored in credits, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for paying out game media stored in credits may be executed only when the number of game media bet is 0. In other words, if the settlement switch is operated while a bet is being made, only the betted game media will be paid out, and if the settlement switch is operated again after that, the gaming media stored in the credits will be paid out. It's okay.

(Lower panel 5)
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel 2. It is constructed by combining two sheets of transparent resin, a design sheet is sandwiched between the combined resins, and the design sheet is printed to represent the special colors of each slot machine 1.

(Medal payout port 43)
The medal payout opening 43 is provided below the lower panel 5. This is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper), which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine 1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return port for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine 1.

(Saucer 28)
The tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so as to receive and store the medals discharged from the medal payout port 43, and is provided so as to protrude toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

In addition, the tray 28 has other functions of accommodating a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet on which an association license seal, a patent certificate seal, and a type seal are affixed, and a seal having an opening for displaying it on the player's side. A housing portion 30 is also provided.

(Speaker S)
The speakers S are provided above and below the front panel 2. It is connected to the sub-control board unit 42 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs sound effects matching the production as well as error sounds and warning sounds to notify that an error has occurred.

(Display device 32)
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel 2. It is a device that can display images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42, and displays, in addition to various performance images, a game instruction image for instructing the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the press position during the game, and an error image when an error occurs. Further, depending on the model, there are slot machines 1 that are not equipped with the display device 32.

(Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories)
Other performance devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel 2, such as around the display window 4 and in the upper and lower panel parts. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42, and in addition to various production images and production operations, it also displays game instruction images and operations that instruct the order in which the stop switches 13 are pressed and the press position during the game, and error images when an error occurs. display and operate. Other performance devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are optionally installed depending on the model of the slot machine 1. Further, various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, a projector, etc. can also be used as other presentation devices. Particularly in a gaming machine that is additionally equipped with a liquid crystal display device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal display device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub display device.

(Medal selector 34)
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel 2, and is provided in a downstream passage below the medal slot 17. In addition to a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by a player using a sensor installed on the flow path, it also guides non-standard medals that have been inserted out of the flow path and removes them from the slot machine 1. A medal elimination function is generally provided. In addition, there is an eject function that removes medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating a switch provided on the front of the front panel 2, and an electrically driven blocking member that removes medals inserted at times other than when accepting medals. It has a blocker function to remove foreign matter from the flow path 35, and a foreign object detection function to physically detect foreign matter that has entered the medal flow path 35. If the medals inserted at the time of medal reception are normal, they are discharged to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector include a passage sensor, an input sensor 1, an input sensor 2, and a chute sensor. The passage sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to judge the passage time of the medals passing through the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 to determine whether the medal passes normally or abnormally. It is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of the input sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of input medals and discharged medals. Since the passage sensor and the chute sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

The components on the cabinet 3 side of the slot machine 1 will be explained below.

(Cabinet 3)
The cabinet 3 has a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and contains a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply referred to as a "reset switch"). '' or ``setting switch''), a power supply device 39, a main control board unit 41, an external output terminal board 47, etc. are provided.

(Main control board unit 41)
The main control board unit 41 includes a main control board case base, a main control board case cover, and a main control board 100. The main control board 100 is housed in the main control board case body and the main control board case cover, and is crimped so that it cannot be easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board unit 41 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet 3.

The main control board 100 is provided with a main IC that controls the functions of the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM (hereinafter also referred to as main RWM). Based on the control of the main IC, general games (rotation lottery processing, reel control processing, payout processing, etc.), which will be described later, are realized.

(Reel unit 6)
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet 3 and fixed by a locking member (described later).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) have reel tapes with a plurality of types of symbols drawn on their outer circumferences, and each reel has a different pattern arrangement. When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, rotation is started and accelerated to a speed of about 80 revolutions/minute (acceleration process). After reaching a constant speed and maintaining a constant speed rotation state in which the stepping motor moves one step for each interruption (constant speed rotation), each reel is operated in accordance with the player's operation of the stop switch 13. The reels are rotated at a constant speed to a stop position determined by the reception position, and after moving to the stop symbol position, the brakes are applied (four-phase excitation is applied) to stop the reels from rotating.

Furthermore, each reel is provided with an index, and index sensors provided on the spokes of each reel detect the index to determine which symbol the reel is passing during rotation. In addition, the number of steps of the stepping motor which is the drive source of the reel in this embodiment is 336 steps, and the rotation failure detection counter is incremented every two interrupt processing during constant speed rotation, and the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter is When the value becomes 180, it is determined that the rotation is defective. The defective rotation detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the defective rotation detection counter becomes 0 before reaching 180.

In addition, a back lamp unit is installed inside each reel, and it can be turned on after the reels have stopped to highlight the symbols that have stopped, or can be turned on to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reels are spinning. are doing.

(Hopper 44)
The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail structure provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet 3, and can slide back and forth along the rail structure. The hopper 44 has a storage tank section that receives and stores the medals guided into the gaming machine from the medal selector 34, and a hopper motor driving means 156 that drives the hopper motor and rotates the rotary disk to collect the stored medals one by one. It is constituted by a medal dispensing section 45 provided with a medal arranging mechanism for arranging the medals for discharging them into the receiving tray 28, and a discharging mechanism for discharging the medals into the receiving tray 28 through the medal dispensing port 43.

(Auxiliary tank 46)
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in the storage tank section are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly sloping rail section provided in the storage tank section. . The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-shaped structure, and when installed in the cabinet 3, two fullness detection electrodes attached to the cabinet 3 are connected to the auxiliary tank through a through hole provided on at least one side. 46, and when a certain amount of medals inserted from the medal slot are stored, two fullness detection electrodes become energized via the medals, and the hopper 44 and auxiliary tank 46 are full. It is determined that Note that the number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method using a fullness detection electrode, but may be configured to enable fullness detection by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting a medal.

(Setting key switch 37)
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine 1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front side. After opening the front panel 2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and turn it clockwise. If the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state where medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be checked, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on in the power-on process when the power is turned on, a setting change process (described later) is performed. Execute.

(Power supply device 39)
The power supply device 39 is provided at the lower left of the cabinet 3 when viewed from the front. It has a rectangular box shape, and is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside and a power supply board that generates a voltage inside. It is individually connected to the rotating drum device board and the sub-control board unit 42 via a harness (not shown), and the rotating drum device board is further connected to the main control board unit 41 via the harness to supply power. ing.

When the power supply device 39 is turned on, the power supply device 39 receives power from outside the slot machine 1, generates a predetermined voltage, and supplies a predetermined voltage to the main control board unit 41 and the sub-control board unit 42. When the switch is turned off, the slot machine 1 is configured not to draw in power from outside the slot machine 1.

(External output terminal board 47)
The external output terminal board 47 is generally installed inside the cabinet 3 of the slot machine 1, and converts signals related to game results output from the main control board unit 41 into signals in a predetermined format. Send outside of. The contents of the game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside are such as when the AT state is entered, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of the counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value, etc. The main control board 100 controls settings can be made based on predetermined information.

(Functional block diagram)
The electrical schematic configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. 25 of this embodiment.

<Main control board>
The slot machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a main control board 100 (also called a main control board) that controls the general flow of games, a sub-control board 1000 (also called a sub-control board), a door relay board (also called a central display board), and a door relay board (also called a central display board). It is electrically connected to the drum device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, two-way communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled, and data communication is possible through one-way communication from the main control board to the sub-control board. A main control chip is mounted on the main control board. The main control chip includes a main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc., which enable data communication with each other via a bus. Under the control of the main control chip, appropriate data communication is carried out to various boards, such as role lottery (also referred to as internal lottery), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), and payout control. In addition, for the sub-control board, as a result of the internal lottery, a selection combination (also referred to as an AT combination, an AT target combination, a push sequence combination, a target combination, and an operation procedure combination that includes both the sequence combination and the sequence combination) If you win a game and the information regarding the display of the combinations (press order, operation timing) is announced on the main control means side, the selection information (select combination group information, selection combination information) can be notified on the sub control means side. By transmitting the information (information regarding the display), it becomes possible for the sub-control means side to also notify information regarding the display of the combination combination. In addition, it may be referred to as processing related to (relating to) the instruction function, including all processing related to AT, such as transition to AT, extension of the number of AT games, notification of push order, etc. Note that the push order combination is a conditional device in which the symbol combinations to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (press order). This is a conditional device in which the symbol combinations that are stopped and the game medals that are awarded to the player are different depending on the timing at which the game is accepted.

<Sub-control board>
The sub-control board is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip includes a sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, a sub-control RAM, etc., which enable data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board is capable of two-way communication with the effect control board, and transmits data specifying the effect to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, etc. Information to the display device 32 transmits data to the image control board. Further, power is directly supplied to the sub-control board from the power supply board.

<Turn drum device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as external centralized terminal board), etc. and the main control board. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether the medals are passing through the hopper appropriately when being paid out from the hopper. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to the hall computer outside the gaming machine. Further, power is directly supplied to the drum device board from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board inputs various sensor information in the selector (loading sensor 1, loading sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, payment switch information, and outputs information. The information includes blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section lamp.

<Production control board>
The production control board includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a production switch, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel 2, an image control board that controls the display contents of the display device 32, and electricity. connected.

<Image control board>
The image control board is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the content of the performance on the display device 32.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the drum device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch. The power supplied to the drum device board supplies power to the main control board and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component to electrically connect it. The power supplied to the sub-control board supplies power to the production control board, and then to the image control board. The supplied power is supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting it.

We will explain the control of the main board that controls the games of the gaming machine.
(main memory)
The main CPU 105 has a built-in ROM and RAM, and the built-in RAM that is cleared in the clearing process will be explained. The storage area of the RAM includes a storage area for switch status flags indicating the on/off status of the termination changeover switch 60 and the on/off status of the automatic payment switch 62, and a setting indicating any value from 1 to 6 to be set. A storage area for value information, a storage area for RT status information indicating which RT status is among a plurality of RT statuses, a storage area for a specific conditional device indicating the winning status of a specific conditional device such as a bonus, etc. A storage area for game information that stores information necessary for progress, an unused storage area that is not in use, a storage area for the stack area that stores data saved from registers, and a temporary stack that is set when the power is turned on. There is a storage area for the area.

(interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, non-maskable interrupts and maskable interrupts are provided as interrupt processing. A non-maskable interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a signal is input to a specific terminal (NMI terminal) of the main CPU 105, and is executed with priority over a maskable interrupt.

When a non-maskable interrupt occurs, processing for power-off is executed. Maskable interrupts, unlike non-maskable interrupts, are processes that are executed periodically (2.235 milliseconds), and when a maskable interrupt occurs, processes such as checking input of operation switches and timer measurements are executed. In the following description, interrupts that have no particular explanation will be referred to as maskable interrupts.

(RAM initialization process)
The RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means 112, at the time of power-off recovery processing, and at the start of each game, and the range of the RAM storage area to be initialized differs depending on each case. .

During the setting change process, if recovery from power failure cannot be performed normally or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area except for the storage area of the switch status flag. In other words, the only thing that takes over the state before the setting change is the switch state flag; for example, the RT state, condition device flag, etc. are cleared and are not taken over.

In addition, during setting change processing, either when the power-off recovery can be performed normally or when the state is not in a state where recovery is impossible, that is, when the setting change processing is performed normally, the storage area of the switch status flag is , data 0 is set in the RAM area except for the storage area for setting value information, the storage area for RT status information, and the storage area for specific condition devices. That is, while maintaining the gaming state before the setting change, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change. Since the setting value data inherits the information before the setting change and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change processing, it is used in the sub control board 1000 to determine whether the setting has been changed.

Furthermore, during power-off recovery processing, data is stored in the unused storage area of the RAM area at the start of each game, and in the stack area storage area excluding the maximum used area when initializing the RAM at power-off recovery. Set to 0.

(Power off recovery, power on)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as when the power switch 40 is turned off or when the operating voltage for operating the slot machine 1 cannot be maintained due to a power outage, etc., the information is stored in the RAM. data is retained by the backup power supply. Then, the next time the power is turned on, the main control board 100 determines whether or not the retained RAM data is normal, and if it is determined to be normal, that is, the processing at the time of power-off is performed normally. When the power is turned off, control is performed to return to the state before the power was cut off based on the data stored in the RAM.

If settings are changed when the power is turned on, the system does not return to the state before the power was turned off, but retains only some information and returns to a different state (initialization). Although some information is retained when changing settings, it is also possible not to retain all information.

(Power-off interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operating voltage of the slot machine 1 decreases due to an event in which the power supply is cut off, and when the operating voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, a power interruption is detected and the power interruption is detected. Executes power-off interrupt processing when detected. When the voltage monitoring circuit 110 detects a power-off, a power-off signal is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU 105, a non-maskable interrupt is generated, and a power-off interrupt process is executed by the non-maskable interrupt.

In the power-off interrupt processing, the state at the time of processing is retained, and when the power is turned on again, the processing to return to the state before the power-off is performed by clearing the output port, stopping the interrupt, and storing the data in the register. It performs processing such as saving the current data, saving the interrupt state and stack pointer, calculating and saving RAM checksum data, disabling writing to RAM, and waiting for reset. Note that without using non-maskable interrupts, it is possible to determine whether a power-off signal from the voltage monitoring circuit 110 is input each time a periodically executed interrupt process is executed, and to detect the signal in successive interrupt processes. If a signal is detected twice within one interrupt process, it may be determined that a power outage has occurred, and a power outage process (power outage interrupt process) may be executed.

(Recoverable error handling)
Recoverable errors include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper-related errors (hopper error, hopper empty error), door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. If you accept the reset switch operation after removing it, you can return to the game without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information regarding the error occurring is displayed on the display device 32, payout number display, and various lamps in order to notify the player of what error has occurred. By stopping the progress of the game even when a recoverable error is occurring, damage to the game parlor manager can be suppressed even if an illegal operation is performed. The conditions for recovering from a recoverable error may be other than accepting an operation of the reset switch after removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered without turning on the power again is referred to as a recoverable error.

(Unrecoverable error handling)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, and the number of credits display 26 displays a display according to the type of error. , etc., to notify that the state is in a state where recovery is not possible.

In addition, if a recoverable error is set, the error will be canceled if the reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an unrecoverable error is set, the error will not be accepted until the reset switch is operated or the power is turned off again. Just turning it on will not clear the unrecoverable error. In this case, the configuration is such that the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again at the time of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power-on process is executed, an unrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed, thereby controlling not to execute subsequent game processing.

Unrecoverable errors include: when the number of bets is outside the specified number during the winning lottery, when the value is not within the normal range during the set value error check, when it is determined that the power off process was not performed normally when the power was restored. In this case, if it is determined that the random number is abnormal, such as when an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator 114 is indicated, or in the winning determination process, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line.

(Game method, flow of game)
In order to play a game on the slot machine 1, first insert medals into the medal slot 17, or bet the stored medals (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals to bet. Note that in this embodiment, the prescribed number of sheets is set to three. By setting the number of medals to bet, the active line is set to be valid and a game becomes possible.

When medals are inserted from a new medal slot in a situation where the number of medals bet is set at the upper limit, the number of game medals (gaming value) stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is set at 50. If a medal that exceeds the maximum number of bets (3 medals) and the maximum number of stored medals (50 medals) is inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (the medals are not inserted into the gaming machine). (in a state that prevents this from occurring) and is returned to the receptacle. That is, the blocker is configured to be turned off when the number of bets is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit.

The situation in which medals are inserted and the number of bets or the number of medals can be stored is when the sum of the number of bets (3 medals) and the number of medals stored (50 medals) is less than 53 medals, and the medals are on standby (from the end of the game to the start of the next game). (period until the start). For example, the requirement that medals can be inserted even while waiting for a game after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and an automatic bet process is executed is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, a winning lottery process is executed, and after determining a winning winning lottery result (also referred to as a condition device number) as a result of the winning lottery process, the reels start rotating. The reel rotates from top to bottom within the display window 4, accelerates until the rotation speed of the reel reaches a predetermined speed (approximately 80 rotations/min), and then rotates while maintaining the speed (constant speed rotation). ).

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is received, the result of the lottery and the timing at which the stop operation is received are determined. The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is operated stops. When all the reels stop, it is determined whether each stopped symbol determined at the time of receiving the stoppage of each reel is normal or not. If it is not abnormal, a search is made to find out which symbol combination the stopped symbol combination is, and the search result is Depending on the applicable symbol combination, payout of medals (including addition to credits), replay settings (automatic bet processing), bonus state settings, bonus state end, RT state setting, RT state end, etc. Perform processing.

(Freeze processing)
Freeze processing (also referred to as freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by suspending it for a predetermined period of time includes, for example, accepting game media and accepting bet switch operations to determine the number of bets for pre-credited game media. For example, a function related to accepting an operation of the start switch 12 to start a game or accepting an operation to stop the reels may be temporarily suspended. Note that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board.

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game described above may be temporarily stopped, or only some functions may be temporarily stopped.

The manner in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped includes control processing based on the player's operation (processing for detecting the insertion of gaming media by a passing sensor, processing for setting the number of bets based on the operation of the bet switch, and control processing based on the operation of the start switch 12). (based on the reel rotation process or winning lottery process based on the reel rotation process or the reel lottery process based on the operation of the reel stop switch).

If an input signal is issued based on a player's operation while the game is temporarily stopped due to a freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal will not be performed, the input signal will not be accepted, or the input signal will not be processed. By performing processing such as delaying transmission until a predetermined period has elapsed, the end timing of one game will be delayed compared to the case where no freeze effect is performed.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, there are cases in which the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated and the reels rotate after a predetermined period, and When the start switch 12 is operated, the prize lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period, but the prize lottery and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period has elapsed, or when the start switch 12 is operated, the prize lottery is not performed for a predetermined period. In some cases, the reels are rotated after a predetermined period has elapsed without rotating the reels, or the predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the winning lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. There are cases where this is done.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the freeze effect is performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13, and as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels. In the freeze effect performed based on this, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

The freeze effect control process performed based on acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 may include not performing stop control process for the rotating reels. As a result, the player will not be able to stop the spinning reels during the predetermined period, but after the predetermined period has elapsed, the stop control process will be performed after the process of accepting the operation of the stop switch 13. The timing until stopping can be delayed.

The freeze effect control processing is performed based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13. When the stop switch 13 is stopped and displayed, the next stop switch 13 is not controlled to stop, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels by the last stop switch 13 operation, the next game is started. Examples include not performing a bet number setting process based on the operation of a bet switch, a process for detecting the insertion of game media by a passing sensor, or a control process based on an automatic bet process performed when a replay stops on an active line.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operations is temporarily stopped, but gaming machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, but the rotation mode of the reels can be set arbitrarily.

The rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period includes rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation, rotating the reels a predetermined number of symbols and stopping a specific symbol combination, and setting a predetermined reel among multiple reels to a stopped state. Examples of such actions include turning other reels into a rotating state, changing the rotational speed of a reel, or changing the operation of a reel due to an operation by a player.

The predetermined period for performing the freeze effect can be changed depending on predetermined conditions (player operation, lottery, etc.). Here, the predetermined conditions include detection of a signal based on operations by the player (start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch) and a predetermined result from a lottery. Further, changing includes shortening or lengthening the temporary stop period.

Examples of control processing for shortening the temporary suspension period include forcibly ending the temporary suspension period, or rewriting the temporary suspension period to a period shorter than the temporary suspension period. Control processing for lengthening the temporary suspension period includes adding another period after the temporary suspension period, or rewriting the period to be longer than the temporary suspension period. Further, the maximum period of the temporary stop period based on the freeze effect is not set, and may continue until a certain result is obtained based on the player's operation.

The pause period for performing the freeze effect may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If a wait period is included, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect ends during the wait period, and if it ends, the freeze effect period is set after the wait period, and the remaining wait period is set after the freeze effect ends. Examples include modes of restarting. Alternatively, such a determination process can be omitted by providing in advance a freeze performance period that is longer than the wait period.

An example of the freeze effect is to perform a pseudo game freeze effect that appears as if a normal game is being played. In the pseudo game freeze effect, a freeze effect period is set between the start switch 12 reception process based on the start switch 12 being operated and the reel rotation start process, and during the freeze effect period, the game starts like a normal game. Reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the switch 12, and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. However, the winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed.

In the pseudo game freeze effect, an up-and-down movement may be performed at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated, at the timing at which a specific reel rotates, or at the timing at which all the reels stop. This makes it possible to suggest whether it is a normal game or a pseudo game freeze effect.

(Setting change means 112)
The setting change means 112 monitors whether or not the mode is in the setting change mode, and when the mode is in the setting change mode, determines one of the set values 1 to 6 (on display, the set values 1 to 6). A winning lottery table is provided in which winning probabilities of winning roles differ depending on set values. After determining any of the set values, the winning probability lottery table continues to be set for the winning probability corresponding to the determined set value until the set value is changed by the setting change means 112 next time.

The setting change means 112 rotates a setting key used for changing settings by an administrator of the gaming hall when the power of the slot machine 1 is not turned on, and moves the setting key to a rotation position where a setting key switch signal is turned on. When the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on in the maintained state, the setting key switch signal is turned on with the power of the slot machine 1 being turned on. In this embodiment, turning on the setting key switch signal means turning on at the rising edge (turning from off to on).If the setting key was turned on before the power was turned off, the setting key switch signal is turned on after the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the turning on of the setting key switch signal is not detected, so it does not shift to setting change mode, but even if the turning on of the setting key switch signal is treated as a level on, and it was turned on before the power was cut off. It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode if the setting key is on when the power is turned on again.

When the setting change means 112 determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting change means 112 changes the setting value of the slot machine 1 into a changeable setting. Activate change mode.

The setting changeable flag is switched on and off depending on the game state. For example, when a bonus game or RT game is started, or when the start switch 12 is operated and medal acceptance becomes impossible, the setting changeable flag is turned off and the bonus game or RT game is ended. or when it becomes possible to accept medals, turn on the setting changeable flag.

In this embodiment, the setting changeable flag is turned off at the start of a bonus game, but the setting changeable flag may be kept on even at the start of a bonus game, or when a specific bonus game is started. The setting changeable flag may be kept on only when the settings are changed.

When the setting change mode is started, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, so that it is impossible to start a game by inserting medals. There are six setting values that can be changed in the setting change mode: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", and each higher setting value is more advantageous to the player. Set up a winning lottery table. As a result, the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio (output rate) of the number of medals paid out to the number of bet medals for the entire game is, resulting in a winning combination lottery table that is advantageous to the player.

After starting the setting change mode, the current setting value is determined. Therefore, if it is determined that the current set value is within the normal range, that set value is set, and if it is determined that the current set value is outside the normal range, a value of "1" is set as the set value.

After starting the setting change mode, the segment display 64 and LED are turned on to notify that the setting change mode is activated. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting values is set, and the credit number display 26 placed on the front of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and the credit number display 26 placed on the back of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 are set. A setting display LED (not shown) is lit to display the setting value. When setting value data is set to 6 levels from 0 to 5, the setting value display will be "1" when the setting value data is "0", and the setting value display will be "1" when the setting value data is "1". If the setting value data is “2”, the setting value display will display “3”; if the setting value data is “3”, the setting value display will display “4”, When the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it is continuously determined whether or not the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 is operated and the start switch 12 sensor signal is turned on, the set value is changed. The current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch signal is turned on without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared and the current setting value is changed to the maximum setting value ( When it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data ``6''), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data ``6'') or higher. data is set to "1"), and when it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set value "1" to "5"), it is incremented to the current set value. When the setting value data is set to 6 levels from 0 to 5, the process of setting change mode is to determine whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), When it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0") and the current setting value becomes the maximum setting. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (setting value "0" to "4"), it may be incremented to the current setting value.

After that, set value display data for displaying the set value data is set again and placed on the credit number display 26 placed on the front of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and on the back side of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1. The current setting value will be displayed by lighting up the setting display LED.

When it is determined that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on and the setting value is determined, it continues to be determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is turned off by rotating the setting key. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the determined setting value is stored in the main RAM 56, the acquired number display 27 and the setting display LED are turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on. Exit the settings change mode by clicking .

Even if the setting key is rotated and the setting key switch signal turns off without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on after starting the setting change mode, the settings can be changed without exiting the setting change mode. Stay in mode. If it is determined that the start switch 12 signal is on in this state, unrecoverable error processing is performed.

After starting the setting change mode, if the setting key is rotated and the setting key switch signal is turned off without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, and the setting switch is operated in this state. Perform normal setting value change processing. Thereafter, the setting key is rotated before the start switch 12 signal is turned on, the setting key switch signal is turned on, and when the start switch 12 signal is turned on, normal setting change mode termination processing is performed.

Additionally, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on when the door open signal is off, the setting When determining the value, by changing the setting value from the setting value after the change operation to "1" ("0" if the setting value data is in 6 stages from 0 to 5) and setting the setting value, the game To set a winning lottery table that is most disadvantageous for a player. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on while the door open signal is off, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

The most disadvantageous combination lottery table is preferably the most disadvantageous combination lottery table among the settable settings, but may be a special setting value that is not normally set. At that time, the winning lottery table with special setting values may include a winning lottery table that does not shift to an advantageous state (does not shift to a bonus game state), such as setting the winning probability of the bonus to 0, or a winning lottery table that has a smaller number of payouts than usual. Examples include a winning lottery table with a set number of cards.

In this embodiment, in order to start the setting change mode, it was necessary to turn on the setting key with no power supplied, but it is also possible to start the setting change mode without turning off the power. good. In this case, it is conceivable that the setting key switch is turned on under the conditions that the power is on, the door open signal is on, and the reset/setting switch 38 is on. The present invention is not limited to this example, and the setting key switch may be turned on when the power is turned on and a predetermined switch that can be operated only when the door is opened is turned on. This is because the door of the slot machine 1 is rarely open during normal operation at a gaming parlor, and it is unlikely that the setting key switch inside the slot machine 1 will be turned on when the door is closed. By adding the condition of turning on a switch that cannot be operated at times, the purpose is to prevent accidental transition to the setting change mode or unauthorized transition to the setting change mode while the game parlor is open.

(Rakuten lottery means 120)
The winning lottery means 120 is a means for performing a winning lottery for determining a prize or a loss as a lottery result from a winning lottery table using random numbers. A winning combination lottery is performed using random numbers generated by the random number generator 122, and a flag corresponding to the winning combination determined in the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is set.

(Type of role)
The types of winnings provided in the slot machine 1 can be broadly classified into bonuses, small winnings, and replays.

A bonus means a bonus that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when a symbol combination of "7.7.7" or "7.7.bar" is stopped and displayed on the active line of the display window 4. Due to the activation of bonus-related accessories, the number of symbol combinations associated with winnings for each specified number changes, or the condition device activation probability of symbol combinations associated with winnings for each specified number changes.

<RB>
RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set with the termination condition of winning 8 small prizes or obtaining 12 game results, and during RB, the winning probability of small prizes is set higher than that of the regular lottery table. A lottery is conducted using a lottery table.

<BB>
BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the first class special bonus. BB is a BB medium prize lottery table where the payout of more than 285 game medals related to winning a small prize is set as an end condition, and during BB, the probability of winning a minor prize (described later) is set higher than the regular prize lottery table. A winning lottery is conducted using the . Note that during the BB, it is not necessary to provide a BB mid-winning lottery table. For example, an RB mid-win lottery table to be described later may be called a BB mid-win lottery table that operates continuously until the BB termination condition is met.

<CB>
CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special bonus. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all the small winning combinations are won regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed on predetermined reels. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

<Control of PB≠1 in CB>
As described above, the CB may be configured such that the symbol combinations that can be displayed according to the operating procedure cannot be displayed (also referred to as missed) because at least all the small winning combinations are in a winning state. For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 ms to 75 ms, if the left reel 8a stops within 190 ms, move a specific symbol on the active line at any operation timing. However, if the display stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific symbol cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

<MB>
MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set as a termination condition of paying out more than 153 medals related to winning a small role, winning an RB, or winning an SB, which will be described later.

<SB>
SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a regular bonus. In the SB, it is set as an end condition that a result of one game is obtained. During the SB, a winning lottery is conducted using an SB middle winning lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor winning combination is set higher than that of the king winning lottery table.

Although the BB in this embodiment uses the BB middle prize lottery table to perform the winning lottery, the winning probability is not limited to this, and during the BB, the probability of winning the regular prize lottery table and the small prize winning probability is set to be the same probability. At the same time, the game may be played using a BB general prize lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased, and an RB medium prize lottery table in which the winning probability of minor prizes is set higher than the regular prize lottery table. Even in this case, BB still sets a payout of more than 285 medals related to winning a small role as an end condition. Also, the components that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means 151.

A small role is a role in which a symbol combination based on a winning small role is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the winning determination means 140 (described later) determines that it has won, a medal is paid out based on the stopped and displayed symbol combination. It is.

The replay is a winning combination in which the symbol combination based on the winning replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the prize determining means 140 determines the winning, the next game can be played without inserting medals.

In the lottery result of the prize lottery, if any of the bonus, minor prize, and replay prizes is not won, it is a loss, and the winning process described later is not performed. When a loss occurs, a symbol combination that does not relate to any role is stopped and displayed on the active line.

For BB, RB, and MB among the roles to be drawn in the lottery, if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the winning game, the winning flag cannot be carried over to the next game or later. (Special role carryover means 146). While the winning flag is carried over, a winning combination lottery table may be used to draw the winning flag before the winning flag is carried over, or a winning combination drawing table may be used to perform the winning winning selection table using the winning flag drawing table during carryover according to the winning flag. If a symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is stopped and displayed on the active line when using the carryover middle winning combination lottery table, it is determined that the transition conditions of the winning winning combination table are met, and the carryover middle winning combination is determined to be satisfied. A transition is made from the lottery table to the winning combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

(Raffle lottery table)
In the role lottery table, winning probabilities for multiple types of roles are determined, and multiple types of role lottery tables are provided depending on the gaming state. For example, this applies to a BB mid-win lottery table used during BB, an MB mid-win lottery table used during MB, and the like.

The role lottery table includes single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on an active line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more active lines. Set according to the results.

For multiple symbol combinations that are set as duplicate winning combinations, all symbol combinations may be set so that one winning combination can be stopped and displayed depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. It may be set to Among these winning combinations, some combinations of symbols that cannot be stopped and displayed are sometimes referred to as control combinations.

The role of the control role is that even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery results, it will be stopped and displayed according to the type of control role that is set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays a role in being able to control the effective lines to differ.

(Winning flag control means 148)
The winning flag control means 148 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination when any of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery. Then, all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player, and the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off when the winning process related to the winning combination is ended.

Regarding the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is on the active line. If the symbol combination of BB, RB, or MB that was won is not displayed in a stopped state, the flag is carried over to the next game with it turned on, and the above-mentioned carryover winning combination lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Upon completion of the winning process related to the combination, the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

(RT)
Moreover, the RT role lottery table is provided in the role lottery table. RT is a gaming state in which the replay winning probability in the winning combination lottery is different from that of the normal winning lottery table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the regular winning lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the winning probability of the replay, or the replaying area of the normal winning lottery table may be replaced with a losing area and the winning probability of the replay is increased. The probability of winning may be decreased.
Further, although the regular winning lottery table and the replay area are the same, the types of replays that win within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined shift condition is met.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table can include the following.
1: When a specific symbol combination (bonus related symbol combination, RT transfer symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 2: When the bonus is won 3: When BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends 4: Specific symbol combination When the specified number of games have been played after (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 5: When the specified number of games have been played after BB, RB, or MB has finished These RT combination lottery table transition conditions can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

In this embodiment, there are five RTs in total (non-RT and RTs 1 to 3, during bonus operation: see FIG. 42). For non-RTs, RT1, and RT2, it is possible to stay in a state where the bonus is not carried over (MB flag is off), and for RT3, it is possible to stay in a state where the bonus is carried over (MB flag is on), and the bonus is not activated. Inside is when the MB flag is on and can be stayed when a symbol combination related to MB is displayed. Hereinafter, the states of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are referred to as non-internal (also referred to as bonus non-internal, type 2 BB non-internal, or MB non-internal), and RT3's status is internal (bonus internal, type 2 BB). (Also referred to as "internal" or "MB internal"), the state in which the bonus is in operation is described as a bonus, but the state is not limited to this, and other cases may be provided. In this embodiment, a process is described in which the status of bonus and RT is changed during the period from when all the spinning drums are stopped until the next game is started, but the process is not limited to this, and the status can be changed during the game. You may also do so. In other words, it may be possible to transfer directly to the bonus without going through the internal process. In addition, if a type 1 BB is provided, the above-mentioned internal may also be referred to as bonus internal, BB internal, or type 1 BB internal, and the aforementioned non-internal is referred to as bonus non-internal, BB non-internal. It may also be called internal medium or type 1 BB non-internal medium. Further, the state within the bonus does not necessarily need to be transferred to RT, and the RT state in which the bonus has been won may be continued. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the inside of the bonus will be described as involving RT transition.

Transition to each RT state is possible by satisfying any one of the conditions 1 to 5 described above.
For example, when pattern symbol 01 (1 in FIG. 42, FIG. 50) is stopped and displayed in the non-RT and RT2 states, control is made to shift to RT1, and in the RT1 and RT2 states, replay 05 (2 in FIG. 42, fig. 46) is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to shift to non-RT, and when replay 06 (3 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46) is stopped and displayed in the RT1 state, it is controlled to shift to RT2. , When the lottery result is MB in the RT1 and RT2 states, and the symbol combination related to MB is not displayed (4 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), control is performed to shift to RT3, and the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. 42 (5 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), the system is controlled to shift to the bonus operation state, and when a payout exceeding a predetermined number of coins (in this case, 9 coins) is made while the bonus is in operation (Fig. 42-6) to control the transition to non-RT.

In addition, the conditions are not limited to conditions 1 to 6, and control may be performed to shift to non-RT by turning off the MB flag stored in the main memory. The flag may be turned off, or a combination of these may be used.

(number)
The lottery numbers set by the winning combination lottery means 120 will be explained with reference to FIG.
Conditions under which the lottery number can be changed include when the number of bets is different, when the set value is changed, and when a bonus game is in progress. The different bet numbers refer to the three-bet game and the two-bet game, and all lottery numbers can be changed according to the bet numbers. The setting value is the value that the hall manager sets the expected total medal payout value as determined by the business policy for the gaming machine, and there are mainly six levels from 1 to 6 (value of the setting value display data). . During the bonus game, the lottery number can be changed by shifting to the bonus game. Note that (*) written in RT2 in FIG. 44 is written as (*) in this embodiment because the MB and the replay-A condition device are won at the same time, but even in RT2, the MB There is no change in the probability of winning. During RT2, it is stated that the MB and the replay-A condition device are won at the same time, but this is not limited to this, and it may be possible to win at the same time with any of the winning condition devices (15 to 34), or individually. You may choose to win.

(Change number of replays)
Regarding the lottery number, if the conditions 1 to 5 described above are satisfied, the number can be changed only for the lottery number related to replay. For example, while the replay probability for non-RT and RT1 is 1/7.3, the replay probability for RT2 and RT3 is set to 1/1.5. Thereby, by playing the game with a high replay probability, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals and add interest to the gameplay.

(Reel control means 130)
The reel control means 130 controls all (three) stopped reels to start rotating when the start switch 12 is operated (rotation control means 132), or when the stop switch 13 is operated. When this occurs, all rotating reels are controlled to be stopped (stop control means 134). Furthermore, after determining the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 120, refer to the symbol control number corresponding to the lottery result of the game, select the stop table corresponding to the symbol control number, and adjust the operation timing of the stop switch 13. By determining the stop position of the corresponding reel and driving and controlling the stepping motor 66, each reel is controlled to stop at the determined stop position. In addition, when the start switch 12 of the game is operated before a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from immediately before the start of rotation of the reels of the previous game, the reel control means 130 controls Later, the reel is rotated by controlling the stepping motor 66.

(acceleration processing)
The acceleration process is a process executed from a state in which the reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation process. In constant speed rotation processing, the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt processing, but if you suddenly execute constant speed rotation processing while the reel is stopped, there is a possibility of stepping out due to insufficient torque. It gets expensive. Therefore, acceleration processing is required to gradually rotate the reels. Note that in the acceleration processing in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 interrupt processing, then the stepping motor is moved one step after 30 interrupt processing, and then the stepping motor is moved one step after 10 interrupt processing. Move the motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing two interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing one interrupt. Move one step. Thereafter, a constant speed rotation process is performed in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt process.

(Constant speed rotation, stop control operating time)
The reel control means 130 performs a constant speed rotation process to maintain the rotation speed of the reel at a constant speed, and performs a deceleration preparation process (also referred to as slip control) to move the reel to a stop symbol position when the stop switch 13 is operated. The reels are stopped at a predetermined stop position by performing deceleration control when the reels are moved to a stop symbol position. In this embodiment, the time during which the reel rotates at a constant speed is determined to be 80 rotations per minute, and control is performed to stop the reel within 190 milliseconds from the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the stop switch 13 is operated, it is possible to draw in up to four symbols including the symbols present in the display window 4 area. For example, if the number 3 replay symbol is displayed on the active line corresponding to the first main reel, when the left stop button is operated to stop, up to the number 6 watermelon symbol, including the number 3 replay symbol. can be stopped.

(Slip control, kicking, pulling)
Slip control is a control that rotates the reels to a stop position predetermined according to the symbol control number based on the winning combination and the operation timing when the stop switch 13 does not stop at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated. Slip control includes kick-off control and draw-in control. Kick-off control means that when the stop switch 13 is stopped, if there is a symbol associated with a winning combination that is not based on the winning combination on the active line, unlike the symbol related to the winning combination, the medal This is a control to rotate the reels so that a symbol different from the winning combination does not stop on the active line because a payout is required. For example, if there is a winning combination in which winning is confirmed only when the symbols attached to the left reel 8a are stopped and the winning position is not won, if the stop reception is performed on the active line according to the stop reception position, then the winning position is on the active line. This refers to controlling the symbol so that it does not stop displaying. Pull-in control is when there is no symbol associated with winning based on the winning combination on the active line when the stop switch 13 is accepted to stop, and if it is possible to stop and display the symbol related to the winning combination on the active line, the winning will occur. It refers to the control that rotates the symbols related to the combination to a predetermined stop position. For example, if there is a winning combination that is confirmed only when the symbols attached to the left reel 8a are stopped and the winning combination is won, there is a symbol related to the selected winning combination outside the display window 4, and the symbol becomes valid from the stop reception position. When it is possible to stop and display on a line, control is performed to stop and display on an effective line. In addition. The rotational speed of the reel during slip control is the same as during constant speed rotation processing, and the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt processing.

(Design combination that does not require technical intervention)
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means that even if the stop switch 13 is operated at any timing while the reels are rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination will always be stopped and displayed on the active line. It means possible. For example, if there are always symbols related to the winning combination within the pull-in range, the symbols related to the winning combination can always be stopped and displayed on the active line even if the stop switch 13 is operated at any timing. It can be said that a symbol combination consisting of symbols related to winning combinations is a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, the attraction rate that does not require technical intervention will be referred to as PB=1. For example, replay and bell are arranged at three-frame intervals for each symbol, so you can always draw them onto the active line.

PB≠1 means that when the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing while the reels are rotating, it is possible to control the symbol combination of the winning combination to always stop on the active line. means. For example, if there is a place where there are no symbols related to the winning combination within the pull-in range, the symbols related to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line unless the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing. It can be said that the attraction rate of the symbols related to the winning combination is PB≠1. In other words, if the symbols related to the winning combination are separated by a maximum of four symbols including the symbol in the display window 4 after the stop switch 13 is operated, the player cannot be drawn in. For example, if the images are not arranged at three-frame intervals, such as watermelons or cherries, they cannot be drawn in, so they cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

(Small role priority control, bonus priority control)
Priority control is to control so that when multiple conditional device flags are on in the game, symbols related to predetermined conditional device flags are given priority and stopped and displayed on the active line. Examples of such types include small role priority control and bonus priority control.

Small role priority control means that when the special role carry-over means 146 turns on the conditional device flag regarding the minor role that cannot be carried over to the next game and the conditional device flag regarding the bonus that can be carried over to the next game, If it is possible to draw both the symbols related to the bonus and the symbols related to the minor win onto the active line at the stop operation timing, the symbols related to the minor win are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Bonus priority control means that the special winning carryover means 146 stops the special winning combination when the conditional device flag related to a small winning that cannot be carried over to the next game and the conditional device flag related to a bonus that can be carried over to the next game are in the on state. If it is possible to draw both the symbol related to the bonus and the symbol related to the small winning combination onto the active line at the operation timing, the symbol related to the bonus is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the active line. For example, when the conditional device flag related to the minor role of PB=1 and the conditional device flag related to the bonus of PB≠1 are on, and if the stop operation timing is the timing when the symbol related to the bonus can be drawn, the symbol combination related to the bonus is enabled. Control the display so that it stops on the line.

For priority control, when the condition device flags of replay and minor role, replay and bonus, or replay, minor role, and bonus are turned on at the same time, the following definition is given as the relationship of stop priority. It is also possible to do this.
Replay > Small role ≧ Bonus (Small role priority control)
Replay > Bonus ≧ Small win (Bonus priority control) In this embodiment, since the small win priority control is adopted, if a small win (Winning - A1 to C6 condition device) is won during the bonus, the small win The symbol combination is controlled to be displayed with priority, but this is the case when the winning A1-condition device is won during the bonus, and the left stop switch 13a is first stopped at a position where the bell or BAR can be pulled in. By controlling the symbol combination BAR related to minor roles and bonuses to be drawn in, it is possible to draw in either the bonus or the winning combination depending on the operation timing even if the operations are performed in the correct operation order. Therefore, the game can be played without getting bored. This is because the number of payouts for the symbol combination including the bell and the symbol combination including the BAR are the same, so the priority order regarding the small winning combinations is the same.
The present invention is not limited to this, and even if a bonus and a minor winning combination are won at the same time, the symbol combination related to the minor winning combination may be displayed with priority.

(Stop position determination table)
The stop position determination table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 120, and predetermines the stopping position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13. . The stop position determination table includes a BB winning stop position determining table, an RB winning stop position determining table, an SB stopping position determining table, a small winning winning stop position determining table, and a replay winning stop position determining table.

The stopping position determination table when winning BB is when BB is won as a result of the lottery and only the condition device flag related to BB is on, or when BB is won as a result of the lottery before the game and the condition device related to BB is set. If the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the BB symbol can be stopped on the active line when the flag is carried over with the flag on and the result of the winning lottery in the game is non-winning, , a stopping position is determined in advance so that the symbol related to BB is stopped and displayed on the active line. If the stop switch 13 is operated within a range where the symbol related to BB cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the stop position is determined in advance so as to stop the symbol that suggests that the BB has been won. (BB reach). In addition, if you have won BB as a result of the prize drawing before the game and carry over the condition device flag related to BB in the ON state, if the result of the prize lottery in the relevant game is a small prize or a replay win, the minor prize Alternatively, a small winning combination or a replay is drawn in by replay priority control, but by performing a small winning combination or replay drawing control that is different from that when BB is not won, it is possible to stop displaying a stop roll indicating a BB winning.

The stop position determination table when winning RB is when RB is won as a result of the lottery and only the condition device flag related to RB is on, or when RB is won as a result of the lottery before the game and the condition device related to RB is in the ON state. If the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the RB symbols can be stopped on the active line when the flag is carried over with the flag on and the result of the winning lottery in the game is non-winning, , a stopping position is determined in advance so that symbols related to RB are stopped and displayed on the active line. If the stop switch 13 is operated within a range where a symbol related to RB cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, a stop position is predetermined so that a symbol that suggests that RB has been won is stopped and displayed. (RB reach). In addition, if you have won RB as a result of the winning combination lottery before the relevant game and carry over the condition device flag related to RB in the ON state, if the result of the winning combination lottery in the relevant game is a minor prize winning or a replay winning, Alternatively, a small winning combination or a replay is drawn in by replay priority control, but by performing a small winning combination or replay drawing control that is different from that when BB is not won, it is possible to stop and display a stop roll indicating an RB winning.

The stop position determination table when winning a small winning combination is used when a small winning combination is won as a result of the winning lottery, and the stopping position is determined in advance so that the symbols related to the small winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, if the symbol related to the small winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, stop control (small winning winning eye) is performed to suggest that the small winning combination has been won.

The replay winning stop position determination table is used when a replay is won as a result of the winning combination lottery, and the stop position is determined in advance so that symbols related to the replay are stopped and displayed on the active line.

(Operation order detection means 138)
The operation order detection means 138 is managed by the main control board 100 and detects in which order of operation the stop switches 13 are operated by the player. By transmitting the detected operating order of the stop switches 13 to the sub control board 1000, the sub outputs a corresponding image or sound. Specifically, the input port is checked in interrupt processing at a predetermined period, and when an operation of a predetermined stop switch 13 is detected when checking the input port, the detection result is transmitted to the main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000, The main control board 100 or the sub-control board 1000 detects the operation order based on the order in which the detection results regarding the operation switches are received. Note that "operation order" is synonymous with "push order".

(operation order control)
Operation order control is predetermined according to the winning combination, and the stop position of the symbols is changed according to the order of operation of the stop switch 13, and the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the set active line are changed. It's about controlling. As for the stop operation order patterns, there are six operation order combinations for the three stop switches 13 (left center right, left right center, center left and right, center right left, right left middle, right center left). It is also possible to control the symbol combinations to be stopped and displayed differently depending on the winning combination and the order of operations. As will be described later, when multiple winnings occur, the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the active line can be changed depending on the order of operations (number priority control, number priority control). Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the number of game media to be paid out depending on the order of stop operations.

(About small role attraction priority control)
When a small winning combination that pays out medals by winning a prize is won alone, if a symbol related to the small winning combination can be drawn in, control is performed to draw in the symbol related to the small winning combination. If small roles have been won multiple times, if it is possible to stop and display all the symbol combinations corresponding to all winning winning combinations on the active line, the symbol combinations corresponding to all winning winning combinations will be displayed. However, if a small role and a bonus role are won multiple times, the priority control is used to give priority to either the minor role or the bonus role and stop them, so that both are on the active line at the same time. Control is performed so that the display does not stop and display.
(Winner determination means 140)
The winning determination means 140 is a means for executing a determination process (also referred to as a winning determination process) as to whether or not a symbol combination constituting a winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the active line. This is a means for determining whether or not the stopped symbols determined when the operation of the stop switch is received are abnormal, and the determination is not made based on the symbol combination that actually stops on the active line. After the winning determination means 140 determines that there is no abnormality, a winning process is performed based on the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed, and if it is not determined that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it is a loss. Perform processing based on.

The winning process is a process in which a bonus is given to the player based on the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the active line. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a small winning combination is stopped and displayed is a process of paying out medals (payout means 142) based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, or changing the gaming state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. , the winning process when the symbol combination based on replay is stopped and displayed is to give the right to replay, and the process to shift the gaming state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped and displayed. The winning process at this time is a process of changing the gaming state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the winning determination means 140 is a loss, a winning process may be performed based on the loss, and a process may be performed in which no benefits are given to the player as a result of the winning process. Further, as a winning process based on a loss, the gaming state may be changed depending on the operation mode when the loss occurs. For example, if all the stop switches 13 are operated in a predetermined order of operation when the game loses, the game may move to a game state with a different freeze winning probability. Furthermore, even in the case of an apparent loss due to missing a small winning combination, winning processing such as controlling the transition of the gaming state such as the transition to the RT state can be performed without performing a payout. Further, as a winning process based on the bonus, it may be possible to add medal payout (payout means 142) based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, or to give the right to replay.

The process of transitioning the gaming state includes setting a winning combination table according to the gaming state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the gaming state to be transitioned to, and setting a freeze winning probability according to the gaming state to be transitioned to. or a combination of these.

When the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning determining means 140 transmits the winning symbol combination information (stopped roll information) stopped and displayed on the active line and winning lottery result information to the sub control board 1000. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output an effect according to the winning symbol combination information and the winning combination lottery result information using the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S.

(Payout means 142)
The payout means 142 is a means for paying out predetermined medals according to the winning small winning combination when the winning determining means 140 determines that the small winning combination has been won.

The winning determination means 140 determines winning on all active lines, and as a result of the determination, when a plurality of symbol combinations based on duplicate winning combinations are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines, the plurality of symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed are Winning processing is performed for each of the following.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 pieces and a small winning combination with a payout number of 10 pieces displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process is as follows: By adding up the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 coins and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set small winning combination, 12 coins are paid out.

Then, an upper limit is set for the number of pieces to be paid out at one time, and when the symbol combination based on multiple small roles is stopped and displayed on the active line and the upper limit of the number of pieces to be paid out exceeds the upper limit value, the number of pieces of the upper limit value is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out is set to 15, and a minor combination with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor combination with a payout count of 10 coins are stopped and displayed on multiple active lines. As for the winning process, when the sum of the small winning combination set as 12 pieces and the small winning combination set as 10 pieces exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 pieces is paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small winnings, but medals for the number of bets may be paid out as winning processing based on replays, or may be set in advance as winning processing based on bonuses. You may pay out the same number of medals.

(Program start processing flow)
The program starting process executed in the main control board 100 will be explained using the flowchart of FIG. 25.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing to set the interrupt mode, set the functions of the main CPU, and create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAMs are normal or not. If the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; if the conditions are not met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, a setting changeable flag indicating a transition to a setting change state is set on. Next, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power-off recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, then it is determined whether a setting changeable flag indicating whether a setting change is possible is on. If the settings changeable flag is on, the process moves to the settings change process shown in FIG. 30. Also, if the power-off recovery data is abnormal or in a non-recoverable state, the process similarly proceeds to the setting change process. After the setting change process, the process moves to the main game progress shown in FIG.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, and if the setting changeable flag is off, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal, an error notification is made and the process moves to a non-recoverable error process in which the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is normal, the process moves to the power-off recovery process shown in FIG. After the power-off recovery process, the game proceeds to the main game shown in FIG. 29. Note that after the power-off recovery process, the process is restarted from the state before the power-off occurred, so the process is not necessarily executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the unrecoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited and the outputs of the output ports (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor 66, etc.) are cleared. Then, the error display (notification) is repeated on the acquired number display 27.

(Explanation of power-off processing)
The power-off process executed in the main control board 100 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt disable/enable state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When saved, the power-off processing completion flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is saved on, and the checksum data of all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited and the system waits for reset. Note that the address range of the stack pointer to be saved, the presence or absence of the power-off processed flag, and whether or not the checksum of all RAM areas are normal or not are determined by appropriate power interrupt processing by the power interrupt means 144 during power-on processing. Check to determine whether the

(Explanation of interrupt)
Interrupt processing that occurs periodically (for example, every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control board 100 will be explained using the flowchart of FIG. 27.

When interrupt processing starts, it compares the necessary data stored in the registers, executes power-off processing when a power-off detection signal is received, and reads input ports that judge inputs from various sensors and operation switches. and measure various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.), and perform reel drive control to determine whether each reel is accelerating, constant speed, starting deceleration, decelerating, or stopped. Performs control according to the driving state and updates the driving state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, hopper drive signal, etc.) to be output for each output port, and it is checked whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various abnormalities include whether the current set value is a normal value or not, and whether the operation pattern of the input/dispensing sensor is normal or not. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) external signals such as a bonus signal, ART signal, and security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, in the control command transmission process, if there is a set sub-control command, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, controls lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The interrupt processing is completed by outputting notification data to be sent to the board, outputting a signal related to the performance test, restoring the register, and keeping the interrupt permission flag on.

(Explanation of power-off recovery process)
The power-off recovery process executed in the main control board 100 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value data is within a normal range. If the result of the judgment is abnormal (the value is outside the defined range), the process moves to irreversible error processing. On the other hand, if the value is normal (within a predetermined range), the unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. Thereafter, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, the registers in use are restored, and the interrupt disable/enabled state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power-off recovery process is completed, the state returns to the state before the power-off occurred, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the main control process for the game progress is performed from the beginning.

In the above embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated during the program start process.

(Main explanation of game progress)
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 will be explained using the flowchart of FIG. 29.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number saved before the last game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number to which the freeze effect should be executed, executes the freeze effect and executes the freeze effect. If the current freeze effect number does not correspond to the number at which the freeze effect should be executed, the freeze effect is not executed and the process proceeds to the next step. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. In that case, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect number is saved, and if it is not saved, the process proceeds to the next step. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets that will enable the game to be executed has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start lever has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been placed. waits for the insertion of game medals or, if the medals are stored in credits, for the operation of the bet switch (if the medals are stored in credits). If the number of bets that will enable the game to be played has been placed and the start lever has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), internal lottery processing is performed and the start lever is not operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on). If the signal is not determined to be on), wait for reception of start lever operation.

In the internal lottery process, a predetermined calculation process is executed using the internal lottery random numbers obtained by generating internal lottery random numbers, and a winning combination (conditional device number) is determined. After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and the stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the reel rotation is allowed. Prepare as much as possible.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum gaming time timer is 0), a new minimum gaming time is set, and if it is not determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed ( If the value of the minimum playing time timer is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum playing time timer is decremented and then it is checked whether the minimum playing time has elapsed. This minimum playing time checking process is executed until it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, and other processes are executed as the main game progress process between the minimum playing time determining process and the process of setting a new minimum playing time. It is configured not to. As a result, the minimum playing time is not extended by other processing, so that the player's playing time can be made available as soon as possible. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being postponed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing to clear the RWM address, processing to store other data in RWM, or other instructions that require a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience an extension of the minimum playing time. After newly setting the minimum playing time, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data related to the rotation stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the output of the rotation start of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is executed. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, processing related to freeze effect (for example, reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved a little or the reels are rotated in the opposite direction, mainly to indicate the level of expectation for the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is completed, a process of rotating the reels is executed. There are four rotational states of the reel: an accelerated state, a constant speed state, a stop preparation state, and a stopped state, and when the reel is rotated, the accelerated state is set. In the acceleration state, interrupt processing is used to gradually rotate the stepping motor.

As mentioned above, if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly performed while the reel is stopped, there is a high possibility that the reel will step out due to insufficient torque. Therefore, acceleration processing is required to gradually rotate the reels. Note that in the acceleration processing in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 interrupt processing, then the stepping motor is moved one step after 30 interrupt processing, and then the stepping motor is moved one step after 10 interrupt processing. Move the motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing two interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing one interrupt. Move one step. Thereafter, a constant speed rotation process is performed in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt process.

When constant speed processing is being executed, the value of the above-mentioned rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each interrupt process to detect rotation failure. Note that since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented every time an interrupt is processed. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is decremented every time an interrupt is processed. , it may be determined that a rotation failure has been detected at the timing when the value becomes 0. In addition, in the constant speed state, the stop switch is allowed to accept a stop and waits for the stop switch to be operated. When acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop switch is not accepted, the lamp is lit in red). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means or by the sub-control means. Further, as a stop switch lamp lighting control, when performing push order navigation, the stop switch lamp may be blinked to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch should be operated to stop the stop switch. .

Additionally, a command indicating that the reels have started rotating is sent to the sub-control means, and when the sub-control means receives the command, it sets a reel rotation time measurement timer that measures the rotation time of the reels and starts counting. . When the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), a message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the LCD, and the player is prompted to stop the reels. Encourage rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still rotating, it performs counting again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels stop. In addition, if the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it will be displayed in front of the push order navigation, so even if the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, the reel stop warning image will be displayed in front of the push order navigation. The visibility of the stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly prompted to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that you will not know which reel to stop, so by operating the sub switch, you can erase the reel stop warning image (or make the reel stop warning image smaller). or move) so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling stop switch operation acceptance in the game progress main process, the stop switch operation acceptance determination process (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, control to stop the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from a constant speed state to a stop preparation state, and continues to rotate at a constant speed to a desired stop position. When the target stop position is reached, the motor shifts to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned on to apply the brakes. Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the symbol number currently passing and the symbol number saved as the stop position match, and if it is determined that they match, the target stop position is determined. Turn on all four-phase excitation as the position. In addition, the symbol number currently passing is the initial symbol number that is set at the moment when the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and when the initial symbol number is moved by one symbol from there by interrupt processing. This is determined by setting the symbol number next to the number. In other words, if a rotation failure occurs on a predetermined reel while the reel is rotating, then a stop operation is performed on the predetermined reel, and the rotation failure is not detected (for example, when the rotation stops before the index sensor detects the index). , it may be determined that the symbol number currently passing and the symbol number saved as the stop position match, and in that case, the symbol combination on the reel display window may be out of alignment (irregular). It may stop. However, even in this case, the winning determination process uses the symbol number saved at the time of stoppage reception, not the actual stopped symbol, so the result of the game may not be different from the lottery result. It is configured so that it does not.

After executing the reel stop reception check process, it is checked whether all reels are stopped. If all the reels are stopped, the process moves to a winning award process, and if all the reels are not stopped, a process of waiting for a stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is executed. Then, after all the reels have stopped, the display contents of the status display monitor are updated, and the process moves to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process is performed to update the RT status, etc., and the main flow of the game progress is ended. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from the start of rotation of the reels to the reception of the stop operation.

(Setting change processing)
The setting change process executed in the main control board 100 will be explained using the flowchart of FIG. 30.

When the setting change mode starts, it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range or not. If it is within the normal range, the current setting value is obtained, and if it is outside the normal range, it is set as the setting value. Save "1" and get the set value "1".

After acquiring the setting values, the setting value display data is saved (S1405). After the setting value display data is saved, lighting control is performed by referring to the setting value display data every five interrupts by dynamic lighting control which is an interrupt process.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not been turned on from off, it is determined whether the setting switch has been turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not been turned from OFF to ON, it is determined again whether the start switch 12 has been turned from OFF to ON, and when it is determined that the setting switch has been turned from OFF to ON, It is determined whether the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the setting value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, it will be incremented to the current setting value, and if the setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the initial value (0) will be saved as the current setting value and the process will be incremented. conduct. After incrementing the set value, the process returns to S1404 and the updated set value is displayed.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from OFF to ON, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting key switch waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from ON to OFF. When it is determined that the switch has changed from on to off, the setting value is saved.

(Advantageous section clear counter management processing)
Among the processes mainly executed during game progress, the advantageous section clear counter management process related to the management of advantageous sections will be explained.

First, the current value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, it is then determined whether the advantageous section flag is 1 or not. The advantageous section flag corresponds to the gaming state, and when the advantageous section flag is 1, it is an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section flag is 0, it is a normal section. When it is determined that the advantageous section flag is 1, it indicates that it has been decided to move from the current game to the advantageous section, so 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. 1500 stored in the advantageous section clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games in which the advantageous section can be executed, and if the advantageous section is executed at most 1500 games, the normal section is set from the next game. This is to prevent people from becoming addicted to the game, to prevent medals from accumulating all day long, and to prevent the desire for gambling from becoming too intense. The timing for setting the advantageous section flag to 1 is executed during the advantageous section transition lottery process that occurs between the start switch reception and the start of reel rotation. The advantageous section transfer lottery process is a process that goes through when a condition device number to be drawn is selected.If the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, and even if the advantageous section transfer lottery is not won. If so, the advantageous section flag is set to 0 (normal section). In this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is a process that is executed only during the normal section. Note that it is also conceivable to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery during the advantageous section. In this case, if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, but if the advantageous section transfer lottery is not won, the current flag is maintained (if the advantageous section flag is 1, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, If the section flag is 0, it is maintained at 0). When updating the advantageous section flag from 1 to 0, it is updated in the parameter initialization process when transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section flag is not 1, the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended because it is in the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 after the subtraction. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it is during the advantageous section (other than the final game), so the MY counter is changed from the number of OUT (payout of the game) to IN (bet of the game) Add the difference in the number of sheets to the MY counter. Note that when the value of the MY counter after addition becomes a negative value, the initial value (0) is saved. Here, the MY counter counts the value that increases starting from the state where the number of medals decreases the most during the advantageous section, and is always 0 while the number of medals decreases during the advantageous section. (For example, if the MY counter value is 0 and you bet 3 coins and lose, the counter value will be -3, but if the counter value becomes a negative value, (corrected to 0). Also, even if you happen to win a small winning combination and the MY counter becomes 10 (10 small winnings), if the number continues to be off for 5 games (3 coins inserted per game), the value of the MY counter will become 0. There is. Then, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 (it does not end if it is exactly 2400), processing is executed to end the advantageous section even if the advantageous section clear counter is not 0. When the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to 0. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the gaming state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section flag to 0, the process shifts to a normal section, which is not an advantageous section, and this process ends. When the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, the process ends while maintaining the advantageous section. In this embodiment, if a replay win is won during the advantageous period, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, the same number of coins as the number of coins inserted is automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, since the value of the MY counter may be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is determined whether the upper limit value of the MY counter has been reached even during replay.

Further, the advantageous section can be ended at any timing other than when 1,500 games have passed or when MY2,400 has been exceeded for each gaming machine. For example, this applies when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when playing an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games). In this way, when ending an advantageous section with an arbitrary end trigger, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to 1 before executing the advantageous section clear counter management process (it is preferable to perform AT-related processing after all reels have stopped). By setting , when the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed, the value before subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter is 1, the value after the subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, and the advantageous section clear counter is set to 0 in the advantageous section clear counter management process. can be terminated. That is, by setting the value of the advantageous section clear counter to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous section can be ended. Thereby, when an arbitrary end condition is achieved, processing can be performed within the same module without using a separate advantageous section end module.

In addition, the advantageous section clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous section clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any number of bets (if multiple prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine) and in any gaming state. There is.

(Direction)
The sub-control means 1101 is provided with a performance control means 1110 and the like, and the performance control means 1110 controls the output of the performance via the display device 32 and the like mentioned above. The performance control means 1110 selects and outputs a performance by lottery using software random numbers, based on the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means 120, which is performed in response to the operation of the start switch 12, for each game. In addition, there are cases where a winning combination is used as an opportunity to perform a related performance that spans multiple games, which is called a continuous performance.

The performance control means 1110 selects the content of the performance based on the lottery result of the role by the role lottery means 120. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided in advance, and the performance control means 1110 performs a lottery using software random numbers after the role lottery means 120 draws a lottery at the start of the game. Select the content of the performance.

In addition, a plurality of types of production contents are provided depending on not only the result of the role lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided corresponding to bonus winnings, minor winnings, replay winnings, non-winnings, etc.

As the game progresses, the production contents include at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamps are lit, etc.). This determines whether the light should be blinked or turned off, what kind of sound should be output from the speaker S, what kind of image should be displayed on the display device 32, etc.
Then, the performance control means 1110 controls the performance output control means 1002 so that the performance is output from the performance output device at a predetermined timing according to the selected performance content.
In addition, BL boards 1018a, b, and c are provided to control illumination of lamps from behind the symbols in order to make the symbols attached to the reels easier to see.

(Production based on player operations)
Further, it is also possible to generate the performance output by the performance control means 1110 in response to an operation by the player. For example, the main control board 100 receives operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc. It is also conceivable that the effect is generated by the effect control means 1110 of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control command sent from the control board 100. It is also conceivable to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to the sub-input switch operating means 1008 such as the key switch 21.

(Movable object 72)
The gaming machine includes a movable object control means 1010 that controls movable accessories in addition to the display device 32, lamps, and speaker S outputting effects. Specifically, a shutter is placed in front of the display device 32, and when the shutter operates, it plays the role of enlivening the game. Another example is that the lamp or speaker S is movable.

(AT)
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period for making it easier for a player to win a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as notification). In general, means for reporting during AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, the operation timing and the operation order, which are also referred to as an operation procedure or an operation mode (hereinafter referred to as an operation procedure). Generally, the target of notification is a symbol combination that can give an advantageous result to the player among a plurality of symbol combinations included in the winning combination. For example, in a small winning combination, a symbol combination that will win the most medals, and in a replay, a symbol combination that is more advantageous than the current winning lottery table (higher winning probability in the replay) can be won.

(mainly manages AT)
Previously, when AT was managed on the sub side, fraudulent acts were rampant (such as unauthorized access to the harness that electrically connects the main and sub sides, unauthorized access to electronic parts on the sub side, etc.), so security on the sub side was Mechanism-based design improvements were being made to improve performance, but development costs were increasing. By managing AT on the main side, costs can be reduced and security can be improved.

(Instruction monitor)
During AT, when informing information regarding the operating procedure of the pressed combination, the obtained number of coins display may be used to inform the operating procedure information. Specifically, in the case of the push order combination A (correct answer in the left middle right), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the push order combination B (correct answer in the left and right middle), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of push order combination C (center right/left correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor; in the case of push order combination D (center right/left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor; In the case of a pressing combination F (right middle left correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of a pressing combination F (right middle left correct answer), a "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, even if the sub-control board is tampered with, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order.

Further, when the instruction monitor is also used as an acquired number display, the above-mentioned numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as an identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the number of acquired coins display is displaying the number of acquired coins or the order of pressing, so that recognition by the player is not hindered.

Further, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using 3 digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of the push order A (correct answer in the left middle right), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the push order B (correct answer in the left, right middle), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, In the case of C (center left/right correct answer), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order combination D (center right/left correct answer), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order combination E (center right/left correct answer), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of ``231'' is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the pressing combination F (correct answer of right middle left), ``321'' is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to intuitively understand the order in which the instructions are pressed on the instruction monitor, and the player can easily understand the correspondence between the order in which the instructions are pressed and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is during an advantageous period, and after the push order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, until the stop switch becomes operable. It is preferable to set the timing to . With this configuration, the player can be informed of the pressing order before operating the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the player from performing a stop operation in an incorrect pressing order.

(Grouping of choice roles)
In order to prevent the operation procedure information from being illegally acquired due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act even when the AT is not in progress, it is conceivable to classify the information sent from the main to the sub when a winning combination is won. Specifically, when a winning combination is won during non-AT, group information (also referred to as a performance group number) indicating that the winning combination is won is transmitted, and during AT, operation procedure information is transmitted in addition to the group information. As a result, on the sub side, it is unclear which operating procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and since operating procedure information is transmitted during AT, the sub side's LCD display and operation Instruction lamps can inform you of operating procedures. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the operating procedure combination by checking the liquid crystal display device, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating procedure information from being fraudulently obtained during non-AT.

(Normal section)
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a winning combination is won in the normal section, a process is executed in which information (performance group number) masking which pressing order was won is transmitted to the sub-control means. Further, when a push order combination is won in the normal section, notification of the push order (both the correct push order and the incorrect push order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means and the sub-control means do not notify the pressing order even if the pressing order is won, so even if the pressing order is won in the normal section, it is not always known whether the answer is correct or incorrect. It has become.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed. The advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by AT. If you win the advantageous section shift lottery held in the normal section, you can move to the advantageous section. In advantageous sections, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous sections are designed to end based on certain conditions and transfer to the normal section. ing.
in particular,
1) When you play 1500 games from the next game that moved to the 1st advantageous section 2) When you earned 2400 or more medals from the next game that moved to the 1st advantageous section 3) When you meet any conditions can be mentioned. With these, it is possible to suppress excessive medal acquisition. Note that the arbitrary condition 3) includes, for example, when one AT ends, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, etc.

(Advantageous section ramp)
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information on the main side to indicate that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. Thereby, the player can easily determine whether or not he or she is staying in the advantageous section by checking whether the advantageous section lamp is lit or not. Specifically, if the DP of the credit number display 26 is lit, it indicates that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section, and if the DP of the credit number display 26 is not lit, it indicates that the vehicle is not staying in an advantageous section. It is shown that. In addition, the timing of lighting the advantageous section lamp is after all reels have stopped, after all reels have stopped, after receiving a bet switch operation, when it is detected that the first medal has been inserted during maintenance, or when the second medal has been removed. Examples include after inserting the medal, after inserting the third medal for maintenance, after receiving the start switch, and after winning the winning combination by internal lottery. In addition, the conditions for making sure to turn it on are that you are staying in an advantageous area, and that you are informed of the operation procedure information for the selection combination, and that the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the notification game exceeds 1 ( ). In addition, the system is configured to light up the advantageous section lamp even when the push order small combination is not installed due to the specifications, and the ball roll rate does not exceed 1, but the RT transition push order to RT with a high replay probability is notified. ing. This is to inform the player that the situation is advantageous to the player using the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering losses due to not knowing the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the above-mentioned conditions for always turning on the advantageous section lamp are not satisfied, the timing for turning on the advantageous section lamp after shifting to a new advantageous section may be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before the start switch operation for the next game after the advantageous section has ended (after all reels have stopped or , after receiving a bet switch operation, when detecting a medal inserted in a care that becomes the first bet, when detecting a medal inserted in a care that becomes a second bet, or when a medal is detected as a third bet. The advantageous section lamp will be turned off when a medal inserted in the process is detected. With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may still be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player is given a sense of expectation that the process related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, conventionally, if the game was in the normal section, the game would have been just waiting for the transition to the advantageous section, but with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible for AT transition lottery etc. to be performed even in the normal section. This makes it possible to maintain motivation for playing the game.

Further, when the advantageous section flag is 1, it does not necessarily mean that it is an advantageous section. This is a normal section (the advantageous section flag is 0), and in a game where the advantageous section flag becomes 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section flag is 1 but it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section. This is because the gaming state is in the normal section. When executing the process for transmitting whether the test signal is an advantageous section or a normal section, if the advantageous section flag is referred to, as mentioned above, a signal of an advantageous section will be sent even though it is a normal section. A signal that is different from the original state is transmitted. In order to prevent this situation, when transmitting a test signal indicating whether it is an advantageous section or a normal section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is referred to. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating an advantageous section. With this configuration, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state by simply determining whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, which eliminates pressure on the program capacity. , and the program execution speed can be improved. In addition, as mentioned above, when ending an advantageous section with an arbitrary ending condition, 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section clear counter, so in the process for outputting the test signal, even in a game where the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section is can be output accurately.

(Processing related to instruction function)
Processing related to the instruction function includes not only AT-related drawings such as AT migration drawing, AT addition drawing, and updating of AT end conditions (addition/subtraction of number of AT games, addition/subtraction of number of AT execution notifications), but also management of AT status. This is a concept that includes processing related to Processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and if multiple bet numbers are set as the specified number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number can be executed. configured to perform processing. For example, if a 2-card bet and a 3-card bet are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can only be executed in a game with a 3-card bet, and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in a game with a 2-card bet. make it unfeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, even if the AT lottery target combination is won, the AT lottery is not performed, or the number of AT games is not updated according to the progress of the game. Also, if the SB or CB that ends in one game is only for a 2-card bet game, and the game after the SB or CB ends is a 2-card bet or a 3-card bet, a replay will be won with the SB or CB. If the number of coins automatically bet is 2 coins, the process related to the instruction function will become impossible to execute in the game after the end of SB or CB (the process related to the instruction function can be executed with a bet of 3 coins) ) Therefore, the number of bets that are automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to 3. By doing so, the process related to the instruction function can be executed even in a game after a replay is won in SB or CB, so it is possible to eliminate games that are disadvantageous to the player. Note that, as described above, the process related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

(Status display monitor)
Hall managers can easily confirm whether medals are being fraudulently obtained from gaming machines due to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, or whether games are being played using modified gaming machines whose performance differs from those that have passed the performance test conducted by the Security Communications Association. A status display monitor is provided on the main control board. The information displayed on the status display monitor is as follows:
1) Performance display of advantageous section of the gaming machine (identifier: 7P. or 7U.)
2) Continuous role object ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 6Y.)
3) Accessory ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 7Y.)
4) Continuous role ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 6A.)
5) Role material ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 7A.)
can be mentioned. Seven segments are used as a display means.

Regarding 1), there are two types of display patterns. The first is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals easily acquired by the player through the activation of bonuses and other bonuses ("7P" type and The second is information indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section out of the total number of games staying in the normal section and the advantageous section (referred to as "7U" type). is displayed.

Regarding 2) to 3), it is information indicating a ratio calculated at an arbitrary timing (also referred to as round calculation) of 6000 consecutive games out of the total number of games mentioned above.

Regarding 5) to 6), it is information indicating the continuous accessory ratio and accessory ratio from the time when the game machine is played until the final game.

The display order is set so that the hall manager can easily check the status ratio monitor. Specifically, the display is switched at predetermined intervals as follows: 1) identifier⇒1) ratio⇒2) identifier⇒2) ratio⇒...⇒6) ratio⇒1) identifier⇒... Furthermore, depending on the specifications of the display monitor, the following may be considered: 1)⇒2)⇒...6)⇒1)⇒...

In addition to the above display content, we also calculate the ratio of the number of games played during bonus periods and the number of games played during non-bonus periods.

<Exception notification of display contents on status display monitor>
To check whether the status display monitor is working properly,
1) A predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after turning on the power and starting the setting change process
2) During setting change, during setting confirmation, 3) During at least one of RAM abnormal errors, contents different from the above-mentioned display contents may be exceptionally displayed. It is preferable that the display content be a pattern that is not displayed on a normal status display monitor, such as "0-.", "0-0-.", "8888.", or high-speed blinking.

(Interlocking system between slot machine 1 and mobile terminal)
Using the slot machine 1 in this embodiment, by linking the slot machine 1 with a mobile terminal owned by the player, it is possible to output effects specific to the player from the sub-control board 1000, and output within the slot machine 1. It is possible to create an interlocking system between the slot machine 1 and the mobile terminal, such as managing the produced performance information on a dedicated server.

The sub-control board 1000 is provided with an effect occurrence flag for managing that predetermined effect information has been output in accordance with the progress of the game by the player, and a game count flag for managing that a specific number of games has been fulfilled, and a slot When various flag information managed in advance by the machine 1 is satisfied by a player, the flag information is held, and this information is outputted so that the player can receive it on a mobile terminal at any timing. By receiving the information on a mobile terminal that can connect to the Internet, it communicates with a dedicated server and manages various flag information on the server.

More specifically, we will start storing various flag information based on the triggers described below, and for example, we will set the predetermined conditions as ``winning BB,'' ``playing 10,000 games,'' and ``contradicting the winning small role.'' The sub-control board 1000 holds various occurrence flags according to the effects and game information that occur as the slot machine 1 progresses, such as ``to make a small role suggestion effect appear'', and when the player operates a sub-button, Various flag information held within the slot machine 1 is output to the outside via a QR code (registered trademark of Denso Wave Co., Ltd.) or infrared rays, and the player can use it on a mobile terminal (mobile phone including a smartphone, mobile PC, etc.). When the game is received by an electronic device that can connect to the Internet, a connection is automatically made to a dedicated server, and the information is managed based on the player's personal information registered in advance on the server.

The next time the player plays a game, by connecting to a dedicated server using a mobile terminal, the player's personal information managed on the server will be issued to the mobile terminal as a password, and the player will By inputting a password issued at the time of starting a game into the slot machine 1, various flag information managed by the server up to now is reflected in the slot machine 1.

The sub control board 1000 starts holding various types of flag information when a password is input by a player, and performs control to erase the held flags when various types of flag information are output. do.

In addition, when a player inputs a password into the slot machine 1, by inputting a password that includes specific information, for example, the character's clothing can be changed to any clothing selected by the player, or the character can be output during BB. It becomes possible to change the sound source that is played.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the password input by the player is cited as a trigger for the slot machine 1 to hold various flags, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a player operates a sub-button when starting a game, the sub-control board 1000 temporarily holds various flags, and depending on the progress of the game, the sub-control board 1000 can indicate whether the player has "seen a special effect" or not. If you want to manage the various flags that have occurred for reasons such as this, you can operate the sub-control board 1000 by operating the sub-buttons as before and reading the information such as the QR code output from the slot machine 1 with your mobile terminal. It is also possible to consider a specification that erases various flags held in . In this specification, if a player finishes playing and leaves the slot machine 1 without outputting information even though the various flags are set to be temporarily retained, the various flags will be saved in the next power-off process. It can be retained until a setting change process is performed, or it can be automatically deleted if no game is played for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the information output from the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above information, but it is also possible to simultaneously output, for example, gaming history information. ``Number of games played'', ``Number of BB/RB'', ``Number of AT/ART'', and ``Difference in medals'' from when various flags are temporarily held (on) to when various flags are cleared due to external output of information, etc. Various information managed by the slot machine 1 includes not only information such as "number of winnings", but also information such as "how many games (since the end of BB) did you win the BB" and "type, number and probability of small winnings won". Information can be output.

At that time, if the QR code output from the slot machine 1 is not enough for one data, it is possible to divide it into multiple data and output it, and the means of communication is not limited to infrared rays or issuing a QR code. It is also possible to appropriately employ general communication technologies such as wired and wireless LAN that are actually used in various fields.

<First embodiment>
A configuration that can be applied to the first embodiment and that changes the end condition of the advantageous section according to the gaming state in which the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery will be described below.

First, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 33 to 35 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the winning lottery in the first embodiment. 36 to 38 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations constituted by each winning combination, and FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the numbers set for each winning combination. In the first embodiment, detailed description of FIGS. 32 to 39 will be omitted.

The RT state transition conditions and replay winning probability will be explained with reference to FIG. 40. RT0 is a state that is set after the main RWM is initialized at the time of factory shipment, or when the number of game medals paid out exceeds 210 while the first type BB is in operation. Move to RT1. RT1 is a state that is set after winning the 1st type BB (sometimes referred to as 1st type BB inside), and is based on the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB being displayed on the active line. Then move from RT1 to BB general mode.

BB general is one of the states in which the 1st type BB is in operation, the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB is displayed and the state shifts to the 1st type BB in operation, and the state in which the 1st type BB is in operation and the RB is not won. This is the state set when the Based on winning the RB in the BB general, the game moves from the BB general to the RB internal (transition occurs when the symbol combination related to the RB is not stopped and displayed). RB inside is a state that is set when the type 1 BB is in operation and in the RB winning state, and the state shifts from RB inside to RB in operation based on the symbol combination related to RB being displayed. RB in operation is a state that is set when Type 1 BB is in operation and in the RB operation state, and the transition from RB in operation to BB in general is based on 12 games or 8 wins during RB operation. do.

In this way, there are three states that can be set during BB operation: BB in general, RB inside, and RB in operation. Note that during the BB operation, in addition to the above-mentioned conditions, if the payout of game medals during the 1st type BB operation exceeds 210, the process shifts to RT0.

The sum of the replay winning probabilities within RT0, RT1, and RB is set to 9188/65536, and the types of winning replays are also set to be the same. The sum of the replay winning probabilities during BB general and RB operation is set to 0/65536. In other words, the replay shows that you won't win.

In the first embodiment, the replay winning probability is described in RT0, RT1, BB general, RB internal, and RB operating, but the replay winning probability is designed to be different in each state. Good too. For example, it is possible to set the sum of replay winning probabilities to 9188 for RT0, 8978 for RT1, 4 for BB in general, 9187 for RB inside, and 0 for RB in operation, and the winning probability for normal replay A. It may be made to be different.

Next, the L mode number will be explained. The L mode number is a number that is saved (memorized) in a predetermined storage area controlled by the main control board, and the value saved differs depending on the RT state when winning the advantageous section transfer lottery. The performance while staying in the advantageous section can be varied depending on the value. Specifically, when the user wins the advantageous section transition lottery while staying at RT0, the L mode number does not change (maintains 0).

Note that when 0 is saved (memorized) as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1400 games. That is, after playing 1400 games in a row during the non-AT period, the game shifts to the AT period, after which it is possible to play a maximum of 100 games in the AT period.

If you win the advantageous section transfer lottery while staying in RT1, 1 is saved as the L mode number, and if 1 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of games staying in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, The maximum number of games during the AT period will be set to 500 games. That is, when the non-AT period is played for 500 games in a row, the game shifts to the AT period, after which the AT period can be played for a maximum of 1000 games.

If you win the advantageous section transfer lottery while staying inside RB, 2 will be saved as the L mode number, and if 2 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of games to stay in the advantageous section will be set to 1500 games. , the maximum number of games during the non-AT period will be set to 500 games. When 2 is stored in the L mode number, the game is configured to shift to the normal period after 500 consecutive games are played during the non-AT period.

If you win the lottery to transfer to an advantageous section during BB general or RB operation, 3 will be saved as the L mode number, and if 3 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of games played in the advantageous section will be saved. The maximum number of games during the non-AT period will be set to 1,200 games. That is, when the non-AT period is played for 1,200 games in a row, the AT period begins, and then a maximum of 300 games can be played during the AT period.

As described above, in this example, when 0, 1, and 3 are stored as the L mode number, a practical ceiling is set.In other words, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is played, the transition to the AT period occurs. On the other hand, if the L mode number 2 is set, no ceiling is set in effect.In other words, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is played, the game will move to the normal period.

The saved L mode number is (1) set to 0 at the end of the advantageous section (transition to the normal section), and then set to 0 at the timing of the transition to the advantageous section, depending on the gaming state in which the player is staying. Set the L mode number, (2) maintain the saved L mode number at the timing when the advantageous section ends (transition to the normal section), and then return to the gaming state in which you are staying when the timing shifts to the advantageous section. It may be configured such that a corresponding L mode number is set.

Next, the start conditions and end conditions of the advantageous section will be explained. The starting conditions for the advantageous section are such that the advantageous section transition lottery is held when a small winning combination with a payout of game medals is won during the normal section in RT0, RT1, BB general, or RB internal. , advantageous section shift lottery is not performed for small winnings that are won during RB operation. In addition, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is carried out, the transition to the advantageous section is made with 100% probability, but this is just an example, and the transition may be made with a probability of less than 100%.

The condition for ending the advantageous section is that if L mode number 0, L mode number 1, and L mode number 3 are set, after transitioning to the AT period, it is determined that the transition to the non-AT period occurs during the AT period. Then, the advantageous section ends at the timing when the non-AT period begins. Further, when L mode number 2 is set, as described above, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is played, the game shifts to the normal period (the advantageous period ends). Note that these are just examples and may be changed without any problem. For example, if L mode number 2 is set and the configuration is such that the transition to the AT period can be made before the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is played, if the end conditions for the AT period are met, the normal period It may be configured so that it can be moved to

Next, the relationship between the game quality and the setting of the L mode number in the non-AT period and the AT period will be explained. During the non-AT period, the player plays a game with RT0 or RT1, and when he/she acquires the right to the AT period, a type 1 BB symbol combination is displayed, and during the AT period, the player plays the game with the BB in operation. In particular, since the replay probability is higher while the RB is inside than during the BB in general or when the RB is in operation, it is advantageous for the player to spend the AT period inside the RB. During the AT period, it is possible to play AT for 30 games in one set, and by the end of the first AT period,
(1): Winning the AT continuation lottery (2): By satisfying one of the conditions of ending the BB operation before playing 30 games, you can acquire the right for the second set of AT periods.

"(1): Winning the AT continuation lottery" means that the lottery will be drawn according to the lottery results of each game during the 30 games, and when winning from Prize-A1 to Prize-B12, there is a 1% probability, Prize-C1 to Prize-C3 has a 5% chance, Prize-C4 has a 30% chance, Prize-E1 to Prize-E6 has a 6% chance, Prize-F and Prize-G have a 50% chance of winning the AT continuation lottery. do.

"(2): End the BB operation before 30 games are played" means that the BB operation ends when 210 game medals are paid out. If 210 game medals are paid out before 30 games are played while the player is staying in either the medium or RB operating mode, the player wins the AT continuation lottery.

As mentioned above, the performance of the advantageous section can be changed depending on the gaming state (set L mode number) in which the player wins the advantageous section transfer lottery, and the player can select the gaming method as appropriate. It is possible to expand the gameplay. In this embodiment, it is optimal for the player to play at RT1 during the non-AT period and within the RB during the AT period. That is, during the non-AT period, if you win the 1st type BB, you will not stop displaying the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB and will continue the game by staying at RT1, and during the AT period, you will win the RB. In this case, it is preferable to proceed with the game by allowing the symbol combinations related to the RB to remain inside the RB without being stopped and displayed.

As mentioned above, the timing at which you can acquire the right for the AT period (the timing at which you can win the AT continuation lottery) is based on the lottery results for the 30 games, and the BB operation will end before the 30 games are played. Although described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined by an AT continuation lottery after 30 games have been played.

As mentioned above, the timing of acquiring the right for the AT period has been explained. If you move to the advantageous section when the lottery timing is RT1 (L mode number 1), you will move to the AT period by playing up to 500 games in the non-AT period, and enter the RB internal period (L mode number 2). If you move to the advantageous section at this time, you will play up to 500 games during the non-AT period and then move to the normal section.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, if the AT continuation lottery is not won within the RB during the AT period, the transition will be made to the non-AT period and normal section within the RB. As an example of the effect when you do not win the lottery to acquire the right to the AT period that is executed every game, if you win the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section within RB, 2 is saved as the L mode number. be done. After that, by satisfying the termination condition during BB operation, it will move to RT0, and by winning the 1st type BB and not stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to 1st type BB, it will move to RT1, and the L mode number will be saved as 2. If you play 500 games under certain circumstances (play 500 games in RT0 and RT1 together), you will move to the normal section during RT1, and if you win the advantageous section transition lottery, L mode number 1 will be saved, and then the maximum After playing 500 games, you will move to the AT period. That is, for the player, 500 games are played with 2 saved as the L mode number, about 1 game before the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and 1 is saved as the L mode number. By completing the normal state (non-AT period) of about 1,000 games, including 500 games in , the AT period will be entered, and it can be recognized that the so-called ceiling has been reached.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the maximum number of staying games in an advantageous period is set to 1500 games, a total of about 2000 games, including about 1000 games in the non-AT period and about 1000 games in the AT period, are played. A series of game progressions can be designed.

Next, an example of the L mode number storage method according to this embodiment will be described in detail using FIG. 41. Note that the processing in the figure is executed by the main control board.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in non-RT mode. If it is non-RT (YES), this process ends without saving the L mode number. That is, the L mode number is maintained at 0. Furthermore, if it is not a non-RT (NO), it is determined whether or not the RT1 is in progress. If RT1 is in progress (YES), 1 is saved as the L mode number and the process ends. If it is not in RT1 (NO), it is determined whether the RB condition device has been activated before the previous game, in other words, whether or not the RB is in operation. If the RB is inside (YES), 2 is saved as the L mode number and the process ends. If the RB is not inside (NO), 3 is saved as the L mode number and the process ends.

In this embodiment, the L mode number saved differs depending on the gaming state at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but the state in which L mode number 1 is saved is the "second advantageous section", and the state in which L mode number 2 is saved is the "second advantageous section". The state where the L mode number 3 is saved is the "first advantageous section," the state where the L mode number 3 is saved is the "third advantageous section," and the state where the L mode number 0 is saved is the "fourth advantageous section." Also called.

Regarding the transition to the AT period, it has been explained that the non-AT period is transitioned to the AT period by playing the number of games according to the L mode number, but this is not limited to this. , the transition probability to the AT period may be changed for each winning lottery result. For example, the AT period transition lottery probability when the L mode number is 2 with a setting value of 1 may be lower than the AT period transition lottery probability when the L mode number is 2 with a setting value of 6. 0 and L mode number 3, the AT period transition lottery probability setting value may be common and the AT period transition probability is the lowest, or it may vary for each setting value and each role lottery result, but the L It is desirable that the AT period transition lottery probability be lower than that for mode number 1 and L mode number 2.

<Second embodiment>
A configuration regarding a reel unit (sometimes simply referred to as a reel) applicable to the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

The reel unit of the second embodiment includes a reel base and a reel sheet wrapped around the reel base.

The reel sheet is composed of three areas: a silver-plated area that is a non-transparent area, a white area that has higher transparency than the silver-filled area, and an unstopped area that has higher transmittance than the white area.

The upper part of FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the interior of the lamp house in which the LEDL, LEDC, and LEDR in the reel are housed, and the lower part of FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the state in which the reel sheet is attached.

FIG. 43 shows the area where the reel sheet is pasted on the sheet pasting surface, and shows the reel sheet surface structure including a symbol area and a background area.

FIG. 43 shows a general reel sheet back surface structure showing the areas through which light is transmitted and the areas where light is reflected when irradiated from each LED. On the back of the reel sheet, the background area corresponds to a silver-fixed area, and the symbol area corresponds to a white-fixed area. Light from each LED is irradiated toward the reel sheet, but when the light is irradiated onto the silver-plated area, the light is totally reflected, so that the light does not pass through the silver-plated area. Moreover, when light is irradiated onto the white-stop area, unlike the silver-stop area, total reflection does not occur, and the brightness of the irradiated light decreases and passes through the white-stop area.

Since the background area corresponds to the silver stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the white stop area, the light emitted from each LED can emphasize and brighten only the pattern area. However, in the case of a general reel sheet, the brightness of the light emitted from each LED may become weaker as it passes through the white stop area.

It is also conceivable to arrange LEDs in the space between the reels and the display window to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbols attached to the reel sheet. This makes it possible to illuminate the entire reel from the outside. The larger the number of LEDs placed, the brighter the light will be; for example, it may be possible to place them at two locations, one at the top and one at the bottom. In this case, it is desirable that the LED be placed closer to the reel than the display window. If the reels are placed close to the display window and the reels are directly irradiated with light, the light will reflect and appear white to the player, which may make it difficult to see certain symbols during the game.

Instead of the reel structure described above, it is also conceivable to make the background area correspond to the white-fixed area and the symbol area to correspond to the silver-fixed area. By doing so, the background area occupies a larger proportion of the reel sheet, and the background area is arranged so as to cover the symbol area, so the brightness of the entire reel can be maintained at a high level.

However, by making the background area a white stop area, the partition between reels (in other words, the sheet attachment surface) is also a white stop area, but it is also a sheet pasting surface, and the light from each LED does not reach. When viewed from the player's perspective, a dark line appears. As a result, when a player attempts to stop the rotating reels by stopping the symbols attached to the reel sheet, the black line appears floating, which may discourage the player from playing the game. This may disrupt the overall balance of the graphic design on the sheet.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a new non-stop (pattern) area is provided on the reel sheet, which is different from the white stop (symbol) area and the silver stop (background) area. . Note that FIGS. 43(a), 43(b), and 43(c) are only examples.

The unstopped area is an area on the back of the reel sheet that is not covered with silver or white fastener. By providing this area, light can be irradiated outside the house lamp without lowering the irradiation brightness of the light from each LED below the white stop area.

A part of the non-fastening area shown in FIG. 43(b) is placed in a position overlapping with the sticker pasting surface, and the non-fastening pattern shown in FIG. 43(c) is placed in a position that does not overlap with the sticker pasting surface. It is located. If part of the unstopped area overlaps with the sticker affixing surface, the light emitted from each LED will pass through part of the unstopped area, but will not pass through the area that overlaps with the sticker affixed surface. . When placed in this way, the brightness in the space is high, but part of it is not included in the irradiation range, so when the player sees it, part of the non-stop area looks black. The visibility and design of the reel may deteriorate.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(c), by arranging the unstopped area in an area that does not overlap with the sheet pasting surface, all of the unstopped area can transmit the light emitted from each LED. , it is possible to prevent the appearance of black lines.

As a result, it is possible to provide players with the brightness of light from each LED, which was provided by the conventional structure, without lowering it as much as possible, and it is also possible to provide a reel sheet with excellent design, not only in the symbol area and background area. can be given.

As a derivative idea, the pattern used in the pattern area may be included in the pattern area, taking into account the design used in the gaming machine. The pattern placed in the pattern area may be a non-stop area like the pattern area, or may be a white stop area. By making the pattern arranged in the pattern area a non-stop area, a specific pattern can be more emphasized. It is desirable that the specific symbol at this time be used as a relatively large symbol (such as white 7) among the symbols on the reels, or as an indicator symbol when the player performs a so-called eye press. By using the pattern placed in the pattern area as a white stop area, the pattern area can be further emphasized.

Furthermore, the number of pattern areas may be made different between the index pattern and the non-index pattern. As described above, the index pattern is a relatively large pattern, and the area in which the pattern area can be arranged is small. In other words, the symbols other than the index symbols are relatively small, and the area in which the pattern area can be placed is large. When a player selects a specific symbol other than the index symbol, the player can use this as a reference when selecting a specific symbol depending on the arrangement and size of the pattern symbol.

Furthermore, the lighting mode of each LED may be linked with the liquid crystal display provided in the gaming machine. Specifically, after the player operates all the stop switches and all the rotating reels have stopped, each LED is lit in order from the bottom row to the top row, and after the upper row LED is lit, It is conceivable to display patterns of the same type from the lower area of the liquid crystal corresponding to the reels. At this time, the color of the displayed pattern is preferably the same or similar to the color projected in the pattern area. Moreover, it is more suitable to perform this performance during a period when AT or a jackpot can be expected (a so-called precursor).

Furthermore, each LED may be arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area or in a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a configuration related to scenario management during an advantageous section that can be applied to the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, by managing in advance the expected value of game medals acquired while staying in an advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the player from acquiring excessive game medals, and to prevent the player from gambling. The purpose is to suppress the mind.

In the third embodiment, if you win the advantageous section shift lottery (when it is decided to move from the normal section to a new advantageous section), one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 listed in FIG. is now selected. In addition, the maximum number of games that can be played in the first advantageous section (the maximum number of games that can be played consecutively) is 1480, and basically a new scenario number will not be selected unless 1480 games are played. ing.

The scenario number described in FIG. 44 is a number stored in the main RWM when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, and is configured so that one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 is selected. . Note that the period is the number of games with 37 games as one unit. Regarding the values of "0" and "1" corresponding to each scenario number and each cycle, "0" indicates a non-AT period, and "1" indicates an AT period. For example, when scenario number "1" is selected, "0" is stored in the first cycle, indicating that the first cycle is a non-AT period (in other words, from the first game AT is not executed for 37 games up to the 37th game). When scenario number 1 is selected, "1" is stored in the 25th cycle (889th game), indicating that it is an AT period.

When scenario number 1 is selected, the period from the 1st cycle to the 24th cycle is "0", so it is a non-AT period, and the number of game medals decreases. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected number of game medals to be acquired during the non-AT period is -54. That is, during the non-AT period, the number of game medals decreases, so the design is such that the number of game medals decreases by 54 per cycle. Furthermore, since the value is "1" from the 25th cycle to the 39th cycle, this is the AT period, and this is a period in which the number of game medals can be increased. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected increase in the number of game medals during the AT period is 100. That is, during the AT period, the number of game medals increases, so the design is such that the number of game medals increases by 100 per cycle. Note that the expected number of game medals to be acquired is the average value of all gaming states in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the numerical values in the figure may be applied only to a predetermined gaming state in an advantageous section.

Considering the expected number of game medals to be acquired during the above non-AT period and AT period, game medals when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, selecting scenario number 1, and playing 1480 games in the advantageous section. The expected number of coins to be acquired can be calculated as 150 coins. Note that in this embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section is designed to be 1480 games, but it is not limited to this and may be 1500 games. In other words, if scenario number 1 is selected, the expected number of medals to be acquired is 150, so it is likely that the player will be better off by playing the game in the advantageous section where scenario number 1 is selected. . The expected number of game medals to be acquired may be the average value of all gaming states in an advantageous section, or may be applied only to a predetermined gaming state (the same applies to other scenarios).

Similarly, regarding the expected number of game medals to be acquired when playing 1480 games in scenario number 2 to scenario number 5, the expected number of game medals to be acquired for scenario number 2 is 1074, and the expected number of game medals to be acquired for scenario number 3. is 612, the expected number of game medals to be acquired for scenario number 4 is -1082, and the expected number of game medals to be acquired for scenario number 5 is 1,536.

When one of scenario numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 44 is selected, the game is played from the start of the selected scenario number (1st game) to the end of the selected scenario number (1480th game). As a result, the number of game medals (held medals) increases or decreases close to the expected number of game medals to be acquired.

However, if the AT period is predetermined, players with extensive gaming experience (knowledge) of this specification will be able to easily identify the current scenario number depending on which cycle the AT period occurs. . In particular, since scenario number 4 has a negative expected value of game medal acquisition, if it is determined that scenario number 4 has been selected, there is a high possibility that the player will leave his/her seat.

In order to solve the above problem, scenario number 6 is prepared in which the non-AT period and the AT period are not predetermined in each cycle. Scenario number 6 is a scenario number that determines whether or not you win in the AT period according to the result of the winning lottery. By providing the possibility of selecting scenario number 6, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the expected value of game medal acquisition is a positive scenario number or a negative scenario number.

In this embodiment, scenario number 6 determines whether to shift to the AT period by random lottery (according to the result of the winning lottery) until the 24th cycle. Specifically, if it is determined by random lottery in the second period to shift to the AT period, the third period becomes the AT period. In this way, in scenario 6, when staying in a predetermined cycle, whether the next cycle of the predetermined cycle will be an AT period or a non-AT period is determined based on the lottery result of each game. is configured to do so. By configuring this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to judge the scenario that has been decided based on whether or not it is the AT period, and to proceed with the game while feeling anticipation for the arrival of the AT period. can do.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected value of game medals obtained when scenario number 6 is selected is -700 pieces. In addition, in scenario number 6, if the transition is made to the AT period and then to the non-AT period, the current advantageous section may be ended (the current advantageous section is ended and a new scenario number is entered). (to be determined).

Next, the probability of selecting a scenario number will be explained. The "selection probability" in FIG. 44 indicates a value that varies the ratio of winning the advantageous section transition lottery and selecting the scenario number for each set value. In this example, R1 has a setting value of 1, R2 has a setting value of 2, R5 has a setting value of 5, and R6 has a setting value of 6, and is configured to have four levels of setting values. In addition, the numerical values listed below R1, R2, R5, and R6 indicate the selection probability of the scenario number in %. For example, at setting value 1, when a new transition to an advantageous section is made, Scenario number 1: 10%, scenario number 2: 3%, scenario number 3: 2%, scenario number 4: 20%, scenario number 5: 5%, scenario number 6: 60%. .

With setting value 1, the selection rate of scenario number 3 is the lowest and the selection rate of scenario number 6 is high, and with setting value 6, the selection rate of scenario number 4 is the lowest and the selection rate of scenario number 1 is high. ing. In general, there are often designs in which the expected value of game medal acquisition is negative and positive for each setting value, and in this embodiment, setting values 1 and 2 are negative, and setting values 5 and 6 are positive. This is the expected value for winning game medals.

Scenario number 6 shown in FIG. 44 is different from scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 described above, and is a scenario in which it is determined whether or not to win the AT lottery based on the winning lottery results etc. until the 24th cycle. It has become. The reason why scenario number 6 is prepared is that in the case of the patterns from scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 described above, there is a period in which the player does not win when playing the game, and the player There is a high possibility that the player will stop playing if the player reaches . Therefore, by providing scenario number 6, it is possible for the player to increase the interest in guessing the current scenario number.

The expected value of winning game medals for scenario number 6 is designed to be negative, with a set value of 1 making it easier to win and a set value of 6 making it harder to win. In this embodiment, the setting value 1 has the highest selection probability of scenario number 6, in which the expected value of winning game medals is negative, and the setting value 6 has the lowest selection probability. Furthermore, the setting value 6 has the highest selection probability of scenario number 1 with a positive expected value of game medal acquisition, and the setting value 1 has the lowest selection probability. In other words, when a player plays a game, he or she can increase the interest of the game while guessing the set value based on the variation of the scenario number.

It is designed to be "0" at the start (from the 1st cycle to the 3rd cycle) and at the end (40th cycle) of scenario numbers 1 to 5. This is to prevent the number of game medals that can be acquired while staying in one advantageous section from becoming excessive. For example, although not shown, if the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 16th cycle to the 40th cycle, and assuming that 100 game medals can be acquired in one cycle, approximately 2400 game medals will be acquired. It will be possible to obtain it. When the 40th cycle ends, the current advantageous section ends, and if you win the lottery to move to the next advantageous section, or if the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 1st cycle to the 20th cycle. , assuming that 100 game medals can be acquired in one cycle, approximately 2000 game medals can be acquired. From the player's point of view, since the player can obtain 2,400 and 2,000 medals in succession, there is a high possibility that the player will acquire too many game medals and become addicted to the gaming machine. Furthermore, although the maximum number of game medals that can be acquired in one advantageous section is 2,400, there is a risk that the maximum value of game medals that can be acquired may be intentionally increased.

Therefore, even if scenario numbers 1 to 5 are selected, it is possible to avoid a situation where excessive game medals can be continuously acquired across advantageous sections. Furthermore, by predetermining the AT period (in other words, the expected number of game medals to be acquired) as in scenario numbers 1 to 5, it is possible to control excessive acquisition of game medals and excessive consumption of game medals. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be expected to have a relatively stable design that does not depend only on probability. That is, by setting the starting period (from the 1st period to the 3rd period) and the ending period (40th period) in the scenario as non-AT periods, scenario numbers advantageous to the player are selected consecutively. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively acquiring game medals and becoming addicted to the game machine.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is conceivable that the advantageous section lamp is not turned on until at least the scenario number shifts to the AT period after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, but if scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 If selected, the selected scenario number is maintained until 1480 games are played. In other words, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on (transferred to the AT period), the advantageous section lamp cannot be turned off until the advantageous section ends. As a result, for example, in the advantageous section where scenario number 2 is selected, the timing at which the advantageous section lamp lights is the start timing of the fourth cycle. In this way, if the advantageous section lamp is designed to light up at a specific cycle, there will be no options for scenario number 1 or scenario number 5, and if the 5th cycle is a non-AT period, (the expected value of game medal acquisition is negative) ) Since the player is aware that it is scenario number 4, there is a high possibility that the player will leave his/her seat.

Based on the above, from the next game after winning the advantageous section transfer lottery and selecting any scenario number, the advantageous section lamp will be lit, and the advantageous section lamp will remain lit until the selected scenario number ends. It is desirable to continue. This makes it difficult for the player to identify which scenario number the player is playing, so that the player can avoid leaving his/her seat involuntarily.

Next, selection of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44 will be explained. In this embodiment, if scenario number 1 is selected, production configuration 1 will be selected, if scenario number 2 is selected, production configuration 2 will be selected, and scenario number 3 will be selected. If scenario number 4 is selected, production configuration 3 will be selected; if scenario number 4 is selected, production configuration 4 will be selected; if scenario number 5 is selected, production configuration 5 will be selected. When scenario number 6 is selected, one of presentation configurations 1 to 5 is selected. "0" written in the production configuration indicates that the precursor production will not be performed, "1" indicates that the main precursor production will be executed when it is decided to move to the AT period, and "2" indicates that the precursor production will be executed. indicates that a false precursor effect indicating the possibility of transitioning to the AT period is executed, although the transition does not occur to the AT period. That is, the configuration is such that it is possible to execute an effect that incites whether or not the next cycle will be an AT period.

Regarding performance configuration 6, as described above, when scenario number 6 is selected, any of performance configurations 1 to 5 is selected, so the player can It is possible to provide a game machine that allows players to play games while guessing which scenario number is currently in use.

As mentioned above, the scenario management and performance configuration when moving to the first advantageous section have been described, but the design may be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the scenario numbers are designed to be from 1 to 6, but the number of selectable scenarios may be increased.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of scenario numbers is designed to vary depending on the setting value, but this is not limited to this.For scenario numbers 1, 2, 3, and 5, setting value 1 has the lowest selection probability. , the selection ratio may be increased stepwise such that the setting value 6 has the highest selection ratio.

In the present embodiment, in scenario number 6, the current advantageous section ends when the transition is made to an AT period at least once and then to a non-AT period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The advantageous section may not end until the transition to the AT period. For example, if the expected value of winning game medals for scenario number 6 is positive, the design is such that it is easier for the player to play the game if he or she stays in scenario number 6. In addition, regarding scenario number 6, the conditions for transitioning to the non-AT period after transitioning to the AT period may include managing the number of games and not winning the continuation rate lottery.

In this embodiment, the production configuration when scenario number 6 is selected is designed so that any of production configurations 1 to 5 is selected, but it is possible to shift to the AT period by random lottery. When the current performance configuration is determined to be 0, it is rewritten to 1, so that the player can recognize that the omen has started. It is also conceivable that when it is determined to move to the AT period, the current performance configuration is not rewritten from 0.

Furthermore, in scenario number 6, the probability of winning the AT lottery (it is determined that the next period will be the AT period) may be made different for each set value. For example, the setting value 6 may be configured such that the scenario number is more likely to be selected than other setting values, but the winning rate of the AT lottery for scenario number 6 is higher than the other setting values.

It should be noted that the number of types of scenario numbers, the number of games in one cycle, the distribution of AT periods, etc. mentioned above are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, in the fourth embodiment, gameplay regarding RT fluctuations at the end timing of MB and at the end of CB will be described.

FIG. 45 shows the reel arrangement in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 46 shows a list of symbol combinations that can be won in the winning lottery result in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 47 shows a list of winning combinations in the winning lottery result in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 shows a list of winning combinations in the winning lottery result in the fourth embodiment. The number of positions is listed.

In the fourth embodiment, BB and MB can be won as bonuses. The CB has no symbol combination, and the CB game starts when the game starts while the MB is in operation, and ends when the game ends while the MB is in operation.

FIG. 49 shows an RT transition diagram in the fourth embodiment. The non-RT is an RT state in which gaming is possible by shifting to the state at the time of factory shipment, after main RWM initialization, or when a result of 50 games is obtained in RT2. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, the non-RT is also referred to as a pullback zone.

RT1 is an RT state that can be transitioned to when winning 05, winning 09, and replay 02 symbol combinations are displayed. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, RT1 is also referred to as a normal game.

RT2 is an RT state that can be entered when the MB ends and the winning 05 and winning 09 symbol combinations are not displayed. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, RT2 is also referred to as the first advantageous game.

RT3 is an RT state that can be transitioned to after BB ends. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, RT3 is also referred to as a second advantageous game.

Inside the BB is an RT state that can be entered when the BB is won and the BB symbol combination is not displayed in the game. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, the BB inside game is also referred to as an inside inside game.

BB in operation is an RT state that can be transitioned to when a BB symbol combination is displayed. As will be explained later, in the fourth embodiment, BB operation is also referred to as BB game.

The replay winning probability in each RT state will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, the design is such that the prescribed number can be selected from 2 and 3 (the prescribed number is only 3 during BB operation and MB-B operation), and depending on the prescribed number of each RT state, The reference destination of the lottery table for the winning combination lottery and the number of game medals to be paid out are different.

In the fourth embodiment, while the MB is in operation, it is a game in which symbol combinations related to all small winning combinations can be displayed regardless of the winning lottery results. For example, even if a losing result is obtained in the lottery result during the MB operation, the winning combinations that can be displayed will be all the small winning combinations (from the winning-A condition device to the winning-G condition device). During MB operation, if the result of the winning combination lottery is the replay-B condition device, the winning combinations that can be displayed are all the small winning combinations (from the winning-A condition device to the winning-G condition device) and the replay winning combination. Game-B condition device. Since the patterns of symbol combinations that can be displayed are different between the results of a loss and the results of the replay-B condition device, a predetermined stop control may be performed depending on the pattern of each displayable symbol combination. . Specifically, in the event of a loss, the control is performed so that a specific symbol combination is prioritized to be drawn in, and when the replay-B condition is activated, a predetermined symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination is controlled to be drawn in with priority. You can do it like this. Details will be described later.

FIG. 50 describes the end timing and RT fluctuation timing of the MB-A game. For MB-A, the MB game ends when more than 72 game medals are paid out. On the other hand, the CB game that operates during the MB-A game ends after the result of the game is obtained. In this embodiment, in the MB-A game, even if an RT transfer symbol combination is displayed, it is not possible to transfer to RT, but in the MB-A game and the CB game, a specific symbol combination related to a small role is displayed. While the game medals are being paid out, the MB game is ended when the payout of the game medals, which is a condition for ending the MB-A game, is reached. However, in the CB game, all the game medals have not been paid out and the result of the game has not been obtained, so the CB game continues. The CB game ends after the game medals are paid out.

In this embodiment, in the MB-A game, when the specified number of medals is 3, when a symbol combination related to winning prize 05 is displayed, control is performed to pay out 12 game medals, but the 10th of the 12 medals is When 72 game medals are paid out, which is the condition for ending the MB-A game, 72 game medals are paid out, so the MB game ends. That is, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 12 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of the 12 game medals is completed, it is determined whether the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers a transition to RT. Since winning prize 05 is a symbol combination that moves to RT1, the next game will be played at RT1. Since RT1 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is relatively low, it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the MB-A game, when the symbol combination related to winning number 06 is displayed in the MB-A game, the specified number of medals is 3, control is performed to pay out 11 game medals, but the 10th game medal out of 11 is controlled to be paid out. The MB game ends when 72 game medals are paid out, which is the condition for ending the MB-A game at the time of payout. That is, the MB game ends during the payout of 11 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of the 11 game medals is completed, it is determined whether the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers a transition to RT. Since winning prize 06 is not a symbol combination that moves to RT1, it is possible to continue to stay in the RT2 state even after the end of the MB game. From the player's point of view, with the specified number of 3 medals, the player can play the game while maintaining RT2, which is the RT state with a higher replay probability than RT1, except when the BB is in operation, so the player has high expectations of winning game medals. This means that the game can be played while the value is high.

In the fourth embodiment, a game flow in which a player plays a normal game will be described. In RT1, the player usually plays a game with a prescribed number of 3 coins, with the expectation that he will win MB-A or BB. If the specified number of cards is 2, the replay winning probability will be high, but since the probability of winning BB or MB-A is low, it is disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the specified number of 2 cards. It is desirable to play games.

When winning MB-A, the player plays the game so that symbol combinations related to winning prize 05 are displayed until a game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, by displaying the symbol combination related to winning prize 05 six times, 72 coins are paid out. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the MB game can be ended even during the payout of game medals.

If it is an MB-A game and the game is played with RT1 and the specified number of 3 coins, there will be two types of lottery results (re-game - A condition device + all winnings, and all winnings). Since the results of the two types of drawings are controlled so that win 05 or win 09 is displayed, if the player plays the game with the specified number of 3 medals, there is an opportunity to get the maximum payout of game medals. At the payout end timing after satisfying the end conditions of MB-A, WIN 05 or WIN 09 will be displayed and the game will move to RT1, so subsequent games will proceed with RT1, which has a low replay probability. Become.

Similarly, in the MB-A game, the player plays the game so that symbol combinations related to winning prize 05 are displayed until a game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, by displaying the symbol combination related to winning prize 05 six times, 72 coins are paid out. In the next game, you play with the specified number of 2 coins, that is, it is an MB-A game, and if you play with RT1 and the specified number of 2 coins, you will win the replay-B with about 1/2. , By configuring the system so that winning prize 06 can be displayed when replay-B is won, "winning prize 06 will be stopped and displayed and the payout of game medals will start → MB will be displayed in the middle of paying out game medals. - The end conditions of A are satisfied → RT2 is set → Payout of game medals is completed → Win 06 is stopped and displayed, so the RT state does not shift. Although the number of game medals won is lower than when winning 05 is displayed in (the game with the last winning), it is possible to shift to RT2, which has a higher replay probability.

Note that at the timing when the MB termination condition is satisfied, processing related to transition of the RT state is executed by interrupt processing.

In RT1, as a way to increase the probability of winning replay-B, it is possible to increase the probability of winning replay-B by setting the specified number of cards to 3, but it is possible to increase the winning probability of replay-B in RT1, By selecting one of the two types to play the game, the reference destination of the lottery table is made different even if the RT1 is the same. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the MB game, RT1, in the game immediately before the game in which the MB game may end, by playing a game with 2 coins with a high winning probability of re-game-B, It becomes possible to increase the ratio of winning prize 06 being displayed (in other words, winning prize 05 or winning prize 09 is not displayed), and it is possible to improve the gameplay. The winning percentage of replay-B when the specified number of tickets is 2 is 50% (32768/65536).

In addition, in the MB-A game and RT2, even if you play the game with 3 coins, there is a high probability that re-game-B will win, so if the player plays 3 coins, winning 05 will be displayed. There is no need to worry, the winning number 06 will be displayed and you can play the game with peace of mind. In RT2, if you play with the specified number of 3 pieces, it is possible to maintain RT2 at approximately 80% (52066/65536), and if you play with the specified number of 2 pieces, it will be possible to maintain RT2 at approximately 50% (32769/65536). ), it is most advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of 3 coins in RT2. Furthermore, when the specified number of medals is 2, the payout of game medals is small even for the same symbol combination, so it is desirable to play the game with the specified number of 3 medals.

Finally, RT3 will be explained. RT3 is a gaming state that can be transferred to after completing the BB game, and unlike the above-mentioned route in which it is easier to transfer to RT2 by winning MB-A and changing the specified number, it is relatively easy to transfer to RT2. It is an easy route.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, by terminating the MB game in accordance with the timing of the number of coins to be paid out, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that allows RT transition depending on the symbol combinations that will be displayed thereafter. This allows the player to have an opportunity to select whether or not to change the specified number before the game ends.

In addition to the above, as a derivative plan, if there is a situation where it is more advantageous to play the game with the specified number of 3 pieces, and a situation where it is more advantageous to play the game with the specified number of 2 pieces, specifically, MB During the -A game, the gaming machine may notify whether to bet 2 coins or 3 coins, depending on the remaining number of coins to be paid out at the end of the MB-A game. It is preferable that the notification be made by lighting an LED, displaying a segment, displaying a liquid crystal display, or outputting audio. The timing to notify is
1: After the condition of the number of remaining coins is met, notification is made during game standby.
2: During the game, notification is made from the time when the winning combination lottery result is determined until the game result is obtained based on the previous condition that satisfies the condition of the number of remaining coins.
3: Always notify after the condition for the number of remaining sheets is met.
is possible.

This allows the player to simply change the prescribed number according to the notification, regardless of when the notification is made, making it easier to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to RT2, and preventing unintended disadvantages from occurring. You can proceed with the game without any problems.

<Configuration related to the main switch applicable to this example>
(Various main switches)
The switches managed by the main control means (hereinafter sometimes referred to as main switches) include a 1 bet switch, a MAX bet switch, a start switch, a left stop switch, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, a settlement switch, and a reset switch. ing. Information on whether these main switches have been operated (data corresponding to ON or OFF) is stored in a storage area starting from a predetermined address in the RWM. More specifically, input port 0 level data is at address 0xF001, input port 1 level data is at address 0xF002, input port 2 level data is at address 0xF003, input port 0 falling data is at address 0xF004, and input port 0 rising is at address 0xF005. data, input port 1 rising data is stored at address 0xF006, and input port 2 rising data is stored at address 0xF007.

In this example, the 0th bit (D0) of input port 0 is set to the setting/reset switch signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the setting key switch signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the door switch signal. The signal is set, the 3rd bit (D3), 4th bit (D4), and 5th bit (D5) are unused, the 6th bit (D6) is set as the power-off detection signal, and the 7th bit ( D7) is set as a full detection signal. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D6, and D7 bits, a value of 0 indicates OFF, and a value of 1 indicates ON.

Also, the 0th bit (D0) of input port 1 is set to the right stop switch sensor signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the middle stop switch sensor signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is the left stop switch sensor signal. is set, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the 3-sheet insertion sensor (MAX bet switch sensor) signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the 1-sheet insertion switch signal, and the 5th bit (D5) is for settlement. A switch signal is set, the 6th bit (D6) is set as a start switch sensor signal, and the 7th bit (D7) is unused. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, and D6 bits, a value of 0 indicates OFF, and a value of 1 indicates ON.

In addition, the 0th bit (D0) of input port 2 is set to the drum sensor signal 1, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the drum sensor signal 2 signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is the drum sensor signal 3 is set, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the dispensing sensor 2 signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the dispensing sensor 1 signal, the 5th bit (D5) is set to the input sensor 2 signal, The 6th bit (D6) is set to the input sensor 1 signal, and the 7th bit (D7) is set to the selector passage sensor signal. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits, a value of 0 indicates OFF, and a value of 1 indicates ON.

When the various main switches are operated, the sensors installed on the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, and when the sensors of the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, the sensors of the corresponding input ports are detected. The configuration is such that 1 is entered in the corresponding bit. Then, the input port is checked every time the main control means interrupts processing, and processing based on the various main switches corresponding to the input port 1 is executed.

In addition, when various main switches are operated, predetermined processing may be executed, but each main switch has a validity period during which predetermined processing can be executed (on the contrary, predetermined processing can be executed (The period during which this period is not valid is referred to as the invalid period). For example, the valid period of the start switch is a state in which a specified number of bets have been placed after all reels have stopped (in this embodiment, this is referred to as a start switch operation wait state), and the start switch is activated in the start switch operation wait state. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing can be executed. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated in a state other than the start switch operation waiting state, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing are not executed.

In this way, when the sensor of the main switch detects the operation of the main switch and executes a predetermined process (for example, in the case of a start switch, internal lottery process and reel rotation process are applicable), in other words, the validity period When the main switch is operated in In other words, the case where the main switch is operated during the invalid period is referred to as invalid detection.

In addition, the state in which the main switch is operated during the valid period (the state in which it is ON) is referred to as the valid detection state, and the state in which the main switch is operated in the invalid period (the state in which it is ON) is referred to as the valid detection state. This is called an invalid detection state.

Next, the valid periods of various main switches will be explained. The valid period of the MAX bet switch is when all the reels are stopped, more than the maximum specified number of credits (in this embodiment, 3 or more and 50 or less) are stored, and the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number (in this embodiment). In terms of form, it is a state of 0 or more and less than 3).

In addition, the valid period of the start switch is the state in which the specified number of bets has been set (including bets placed by automatic bet processing), and the valid period of the left stop switch is the state in which the left reel rotates at a constant speed. The valid period of the middle stop switch is when the middle reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), and the valid period of the right stop switch is when the right reel is rotating at a constant speed. It is a state in which it is rotating at high speed (constant speed state), and the valid period of the settlement switch is a state in which all the reels are stopped and one or more reels are stored in the credit, and the valid period of the reset switch is, This is a state in which an error is detected and an error flag is set (the valid period may also be set during the setting change mode).

Next, predetermined processes executed by various main switches will be explained. The predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch is 3 bet processing, etc. The predetermined processing based on the start switch when the operation of the start switch is detected is internal lottery processing, reel rotation processing, etc. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch. The predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is the left reel stop control processing, etc., and the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. The process is a stop control process for the middle reel, etc., and a predetermined process based on the right stop switch when the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch is a stop control process for the right reel. The predetermined process based on the payment switch when the payment switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch during the validity period of the payment switch is payment processing (disbursement processing), etc., and the reset during the validity period of the reset switch. The predetermined process based on the reset switch when the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch is an error release process or the like.

When a plurality of main switches among various main switches are operated at the same time, processing based on the operated main switch may not be executed. The operation when such a plurality of main switches are operated simultaneously (all the plurality of main switches are turned on) will be described in detail below.

(Processing of other main switches when MAX bet switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the specified process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is activated. If the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the payment switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is activated. The configuration is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the information.

With this configuration, if the MAX bet switch malfunctions and the MAX bet switch is always ON (level data of the MAX bet switch sensor is always 1) regardless of whether the player operates the MAX bet switch or not. does not execute a predetermined process based on other main switches (excluding the reset switch), making it easier to detect that the MAX bet switch is out of order. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, settlement can be prevented in the event that the MAX bet switch is broken due to fraudulent activity, and the gaming parlor can be prevented from being illegally exploited for profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process is executed based on the reset switch, when errors occur simultaneously, it is possible to cancel the error and stop the warning sound, so that the operation of the game parlor is not interrupted.

(Processing of other main switches when MAX bet switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the specified process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is activated. If the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the payment switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the process is executed based on the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing.

With this configuration, if the MAX bet switch is always turned on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches (excluding the settlement switch and reset switch) will not be executed. It becomes easier to detect that the bet switch is malfunctioning. Furthermore, by executing a predetermined process based on the payment switch, the player can discharge the medals he has accumulated, and the player can stop playing at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process is executed based on the reset switch, when errors occur simultaneously, it is possible to cancel the error and stop the warning sound, so that the operation of the game parlor is not interrupted.

(Processing of other main switches when MAX bet switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and the left stop is activated during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, a predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is executed. When the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is executed, and the payment is made during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch malfunctions and is always turned on, the game can continue, so even if the MAX bet switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can continue. can be completed. As a result, the game can be played for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the player can discharge the accumulated medals, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bet switch is always turned on due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs at the same time, the reset switch can be operated. Since it is possible to cancel a predetermined error and to stop outputting a warning sound related to a predetermined error, it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when MAX bet switch detects invalidity 4)
The processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects an operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, a predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop is executed. A predetermined process based on the switch is executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. configured to perform processing.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always turned on due to a malfunction, the game can continue as long as the game is in progress (for example, if the reels are spinning, the stop button cannot be operated. Since the rotation of the reels can be stopped because the MAX bet switch is activated, the game can be completed even if the MAX bet switch fails at any point during the game, and the bet amount used by the player at the start of the game will be returned. Since the game can be played, troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Further, since a new game cannot be started when the MAX bet switch is out of order, troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, settlement can be prevented in the event that the MAX bet switch is broken due to fraudulent activity, and the gaming parlor can be prevented from being illegally exploited for profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. It is possible to cancel the error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, so it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches 1 when the start switch is detected as invalid)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the start switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated. When the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, if the start switch is always turned on due to a failure, the specified processing based on the other main switches (excluding the reset switch) will not be executed, so the start switch will fail. It becomes easier to notice what is happening. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement in the event that the start switch malfunctions due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the gaming parlor from being fraudulently exploited for profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is detected as invalid 2)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the start switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the validity period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, it is reset. It is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the switch.

With this configuration, if the start switch is always turned on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches (excluding the payment switch and reset switch) will not be executed, so the start switch It becomes easier to detect that something is malfunctioning. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the player can discharge the accumulated medals, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is detected as invalid 3)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the start switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the left stop switch is activated during the valid period. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, a predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. A predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the validity period of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and the payment switch is activated. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. It is configured to perform the following processing.

With this configuration, even if the start switch malfunctions and is always turned on, the game can continue, so even if the start switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can be completed. be able to. As a result, the game can be played for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the player can discharge the accumulated medals, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is detected as invalid 4)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the start switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, a predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. executes a predetermined process based on the middle stop switch, and when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the validity period of the right stop switch, executes a predetermined process based on the right stop switch, and When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is activated. The configuration is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the information.

With this configuration, even if the start switch is malfunctioning and is always turned on, the game can continue as long as the game is in progress (for example, if the reels are spinning, operating the stop button is effective. Therefore, even if the start switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can be completed, and the game will be worth the bet used by the player at the start of the game. Since it can be executed, troubles between players and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Further, since no new bets are placed when the start switch is out of order, it is difficult to start the game, which prevents troubles between players and the gaming parlor. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, settlement can be prevented in the event that the MAX bet switch is broken due to fraudulent activity, and the gaming parlor can be prevented from being illegally exploited for profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches 1 when the left stop switch is detected as invalid)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the intermediate stop switch sensor detects the operation of the intermediate stop switch during the valid period of the intermediate stop switch, the intermediate stop switch sensor detects the operation of the intermediate stop switch. If the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the payment switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the reset switch is activated. The configuration is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the information.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches will not be executed, so it is possible to detect that the left stop switch is malfunctioning. It becomes easier to detect. Further, by not executing a predetermined process based on the payment switch, payment can be prevented in the event that the left stop switch breaks down due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the gaming parlor from illegally exploiting profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. It is possible to cancel the error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, so it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches 2 when the left stop switch is detected as invalid)
The processing to be performed when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the intermediate stop switch sensor detects operation of the intermediate stop switch during the valid period of the intermediate stop switch, the intermediate stop switch sensor detects operation of the intermediate stop switch. If the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the payment switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the process is executed based on the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches will not be executed, so it is possible to detect that the left stop switch is malfunctioning. It becomes easier to detect. Furthermore, by executing a predetermined process based on the payment switch, the player can discharge the medals he has accumulated, and the player can stop playing at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. It is possible to cancel the error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, so it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when left stop switch is detected as invalid 3)
The processing to be performed when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the intermediate stop switch sensor detects operation of the intermediate stop switch during the valid period of the intermediate stop switch, the intermediate stop switch is activated. When the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is executed, and the payment is made during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the left stop switch malfunctions and is always turned on, the game can continue, so even if the left stop switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can continue. can be completed. As a result, the game can be played for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Furthermore, by executing a predetermined process based on the payment switch, the player can discharge the medals he has accumulated, and the player can stop playing at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. It is possible to cancel the error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, so it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when left stop switch is detected as invalid 4)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. When the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the intermediate stop switch sensor detects operation of the intermediate stop switch during the valid period of the intermediate stop switch, the intermediate stop switch is activated. If the right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch will not be executed, and the specified process based on the right stop switch will not be executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, the predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. configured to perform processing.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is malfunctioning and is always turned on, the specified processing based on the middle and right stop switches will not be executed, so it will be assumed that the left stop switch is malfunctioning. becomes easier to detect. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the player can discharge the accumulated medals, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. It is possible to cancel the error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, so it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

Note that the processing of other main switches when the middle stop switch detects invalidity and the processing of other main switches when the right stop switch detects invalidity are the same as those of other main switches when the left stop switch described above detects invalidity. Since this is the same as switch processing 1 to 4, the description will be omitted.

(Processing of other main switches when the payment switch detects invalidity 1)
The following describes the process when the payment switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, and the right stop switch is not executed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, if the payment switch is always turned on due to a malfunction, the system will not execute the specified processing based on the other main switches, so it will not be possible to detect that the payment switch is malfunctioning. It becomes easier. Further, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the gaming parlor from illegally exploiting profits. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the payment switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the operation of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the payment switch detects invalidity 2)
The following describes the process when the payment switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the right stop switch, the right When the stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects an operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. It is configured to perform the following processing.

With this configuration, even if the payment switch is malfunctioning and is always turned on, the game can continue, so even if the payment switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can be completed. be able to. As a result, the game can be played for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the payment switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the payment switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing to be performed when another main switch is operated while the payment switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. A predetermined process based on the switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects an operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the right stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is activated. The configuration is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the information.

With this configuration, even if the payment switch is always turned on due to a malfunction, the game can continue as long as the game is in progress (for example, if the reels are spinning, the stop button can be operated effectively). Therefore, even if the settlement switch breaks down at any point during a game, the game can be completed, and the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game will be Since it can be executed, troubles between players and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Further, since no new bets are placed when the settlement switch is out of order, it is difficult to start a new game, thereby preventing trouble between the player and the gaming parlor. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the payment switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the predetermined process can be executed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to avoid interfering with the business of the game parlor and the games of other players.

(Processing of other main switches 1 when the reset switch detects invalidity)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, and the right stop switch is not executed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch. It is configured not to execute predetermined processing based on the payment switch.

With this configuration, if the reset switch is always turned on due to a malfunction, it will not execute the specified process based on the other main switches, so it will be able to detect that the reset switch is malfunctioning. It becomes easier. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the gaming parlor from being illegally exploited for profits. Furthermore, if an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of canceling the error by illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is detected as invalid 2)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed, and the right stop switch is not executed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the prescribed process based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing based on the payment switch.

With this configuration, if the reset switch is always turned on due to a failure, the reset switch will fail because the specified processing based on the other main switches (excluding the payment switch) will not be executed. It becomes easier to notice what is going on. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the player can discharge the accumulated medals, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, if an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of canceling the error by illegal means. Furthermore, if an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of canceling the error by illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch detects invalidity 3)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the validity period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the right stop switch, the right When the stop switch sensor detects an operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects an operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed. It is configured to perform the following processing.

With this configuration, even if the reset switch is malfunctioning and is always turned on, the game can continue, so even if the reset switch malfunctions at any point during the game, the game can be completed. be able to. As a result, the game can be played for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, so troubles between the player and the gaming parlor can be prevented. Furthermore, by executing a predetermined process based on the payment switch, the player can discharge the medals he has accumulated, and the player can stop playing at any time. Furthermore, if an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of canceling the error by illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is detected as invalid 4)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues will be explained. When the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the right stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the processing is executed based on the settlement switch. It is configured not to execute predetermined processing.

With this configuration, even if the reset switch is always turned on due to a malfunction, the game can be continued (for example, if the reels are spinning, the stop button is valid, so the reels can be turned on). (the rotation can be stopped), the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. However, even if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, it does not execute a predetermined process, making it difficult to start a new game. Furthermore, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the gaming parlor from being illegally exploited for profits. Furthermore, if an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be canceled, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of canceling the error by illegal means.

Note that when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the disabled detection state, the error cannot be cleared because the error is cleared based on the rising edge of the reset switch signal, and the reset switch is in the disabled detection state. In this case, the rising signal does not turn ON, so the error cannot be cleared. In addition, if the configuration is such that the error is canceled based on the falling signal instead of the rising signal (error is canceled by turning OFF→ON→OFF), the reset switch must be turned ON and OFF when canceling the error due to unauthorized operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a configuration that makes it more difficult to clear the error.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is valid)
The processing when the MAX bet switch is detected as valid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be explained. Note that in a situation where the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid, the other main switches that can be operated are the start switch, the settlement switch, or the reset switch. When the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is in an invalid detection state, the start switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the start switch when the MAX bet switch is in an invalid detection state. When the operation of the start switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch. The configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX Bet Switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility that it is fraudulent, so the game cannot proceed, and if the switch continues to operate after the MAX Bet Switch detects that it is invalid. It is assumed that the possibility of fraud is low when the game is being manipulated, and the game is allowed to proceed.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned process 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity, the settlement can be made within the validity period of the settlement switch when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, it executes a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state, the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch. In this case, the predetermined process based on the payment switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which a game is settled due to an unauthorized operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX bet switch detects validity, there is a high possibility of fraud, and settlement of the game is made impossible, and if the switch continues to operate after the MAX bet switch detects invalidity, there is a high possibility of fraud. The game is allowed to be settled because the possibility of fraud is low when the game is being manipulated.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the reset switch sensor detects an operation of the reset switch sensor during the valid period of the reset switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is in an invalid detection state, the reset switch can be activated when the MAX bet switch is in an invalid detection state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. The configuration is such that when an operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which an error is canceled due to an unauthorized operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX bet switch detects validity, there is a high possibility of fraud, so it is impossible to clear the error, and the switch continues to operate after the MAX bet switch detects invalidity. It is possible to clear the error because the possibility of fraud is low in this state.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is valid detection)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the start switch is detected to be valid and this state continues will be explained. Note that in a situation where the start switch is detected to be valid, other main switches whose operation can be valid include a stop switch (left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch) or a reset switch. When the start switch is in a valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects an operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with Process 3 or 4 of other main switches when the start switch is in an invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor can be activated during the valid period of the stop switch when the start switch is in an invalid detection state. When the stop switch detects operation of the stop switch, executes a predetermined process based on the stop switch, and when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch. The configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the start switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the start switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. In this state, the possibility of fraud is low, and the game can proceed.

Further, when the start switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch when the reset switch sensor detects an operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of other main switches when the start switch is in an invalid detection state, the valid period of the reset switch can be reduced when the start switch is in an invalid detection state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, it executes a predetermined process based on the reset switch, and when the start switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When detected, the configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the start switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid, there is a high possibility that it is fraudulent, so it is impossible to clear the error, and if the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be invalid. This state is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the error can be cleared.

Further, when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with Process 1 or 2 of other main switches when the start switch is in an invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor can be activated during the effective period of the stop switch when the start switch is in an invalid detection state. does not execute the prescribed process based on the stop switch when it detects operation of the stop switch, and when the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch while the start switch is in the valid detection state. The configuration is such that a predetermined process is executed based on a stop switch.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the start switch is detected to be valid, it is likely that the start switch was operated by the player, and each stop switch is operated in order to finish the game. If the switch continues to be operated after detecting that the start switch is invalid, it is highly likely that the start switch was operated by a factor other than the player's operation (incorrect or malfunctioning), and the game is prohibited. In order to prevent the process from ending to the end, each stop switch is made impossible to operate.

(Processing of other main switches when the stop switch is valid detection)
The process will be described when another main switch is operated while the stop switch is detected to be valid and this state continues. Note that in a situation where the stop switch is detected to be valid, other main switches whose operation can be valid include a stop switch (a stop switch that is not operated) or a reset switch. When all the reels are rotating, when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, during the valid period of the middle or right stop switch, or when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch. It is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned processing 3 of other main switches when the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, when the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, it is possible to When the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, the middle or right stop switch is activated. During the valid period of the right stop switch, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects an operation of the middle or right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the left stop switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch detects validity, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. It is assumed that the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the game is being operated, and the game is allowed to proceed.

In addition, when all the reels are rotating and the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, if the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch will not be executed. It is configured like this. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of other main switches when the left stop switch is in the disabled state, the reset switch can be activated when the left stop switch is in the disabled state. When the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the valid period, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. The configuration is such that when an operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an error from being canceled due to unauthorized operation of the left stop switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the error cannot be cleared. It is possible to release the error because the possibility of fraud is low in the state in which it is being manipulated.

In addition, when all the reels are rotating and the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, the middle or right stop switch sensor detects operation of the middle or right stop switch during the valid period of the middle or right stop switch. When the stop switch is in the middle or right position, a predetermined process is executed. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned processing 1, 2, or 4 of other main switches when the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, the center or right stop switch can be activated when the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state. During the valid period of the switch, or when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the middle or right stop switch, the specified process based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed and the left stop switch is in the valid detection state. A configuration in which, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects operation of the middle or right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed during the valid period of the middle or right stop switch. becomes.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, it is highly likely that the left stop switch was operated by the player. If the stop switch is enabled to be operated and the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected as invalid, there is a possibility that the left stop switch was operated by the player due to factors other than operation (incorrect or malfunction). Since the amount of play is high, the remaining stop switches are made inoperable in order to prevent the game from ending.

(Processing of other main switches when the payment switch is valid detection)
The processing will be explained when another main switch is operated while the payment switch is detected to be valid and this state continues. Note that in a situation where the settlement switch is detected to be valid, other main switches whose operation can be valid include the MAX bet switch or the reset switch. When the settlement switch is in the validity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the validity period of the MAX bet switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned process 2 of the other main switch when the settlement switch detects invalidity, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch when the settlement switch detects invalidity. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When detected, the configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game proceeds due to unauthorized operation of the settlement switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the checkout switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. In this state, the possibility of fraud is low, and the game can proceed. In addition, the situations in which the MAX bet switch can be operated while the settlement switch is in a valid detection state include situations where only the bet amount is settled when a bet is placed as a settlement process, or a situation where only the bet amount is settled when a bet is placed as a settlement process. This applies to the situation from when you settle the bet first and then settle the credit portion until you settle the credit portion.

In addition, when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state and the reset switch sensor detects an operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the system is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned process 1, 2, or 3 of the other main switch when the payment switch detects invalidity, it is possible to reset during the valid period of the reset switch when the payment switch detects invalidity. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. In this case, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which an error is canceled due to unauthorized operation of the payment switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the checkout switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the error cannot be cleared. This state allows the error to be cleared, as the possibility of fraud is low.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is valid detection)
The process to be performed when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is detected to be valid and this state continues will be explained. Note that in a situation where the reset switch is detected to be valid, other main switches whose operation can be valid include the MAX bet switch, start switch, stop switch, or settlement switch. When the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch. By combining such a configuration with the above-mentioned process 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When detected, the configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. In this state, the possibility of fraud is low, and the game can proceed.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects an operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with Process 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state described above, the start switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the start switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the start switch detects operation of the start switch, executes a predetermined process based on the start switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch. The configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. In this state, the possibility of fraud is low, and the game can proceed.

Furthermore, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects an operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, the system is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned process 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor can be activated during the valid period of the stop switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the stop switch detects operation of the stop switch, executes a predetermined process based on the stop switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch. The configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to unauthorized operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the game is made impossible to proceed. In this state, the possibility of fraud is low, and the game can proceed.

Furthermore, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects an operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the system is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch. By combining this configuration with the above-mentioned process 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the settlement switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the settlement switch when the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the reset switch detects the operation of the settlement switch, executes a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch. The configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the payment switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game is settled due to unauthorized operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch detects that it is invalid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and settlement of the game is made impossible, and if the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch detects that it is invalid. If the game is in a state where the possibility of fraud is low, it is possible to settle the game.

Furthermore, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects an operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed. . By combining such a configuration with the above-mentioned processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid state, it is possible to When the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, it is likely that the reset switch is operating normally, allowing the game to proceed, and if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is invalid. If the reset switch continues to be operated, it is highly likely that the reset switch is being operated abnormally (unauthorizedly), and the game is made impossible to proceed. In addition, if the game is enabled to proceed, at least the game is configured to be able to be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or if there is a malfunction but it does not interfere with the game. Since there is no error, a configuration may be adopted in which the game can be continued until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel once an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects an operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with Process 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state described above, the start switch sensor can be activated during the valid period of the start switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. does not execute the specified process based on the start switch when the start switch detects operation of the start switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch. The configuration is such that a predetermined process is executed based on the start switch.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, it is likely that the reset switch is operating normally, and the game can continue, and if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is invalid. If the reset switch continues to be operated, it is highly likely that the reset switch is being operated abnormally (unauthorizedly), and the game is made impossible to proceed. In addition, if the game is enabled to proceed, at least the game is configured to be able to be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or if there is a malfunction but it does not interfere with the game. Since there is no error, a configuration may be adopted in which the game can be continued until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel once an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the above-mentioned process 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the stop switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. does not execute the prescribed processing based on the stop switch when it detects operation of the stop switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch. The configuration is such that a predetermined process is executed based on a stop switch.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, it is likely that the reset switch is operating normally, allowing the game to proceed, and if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is invalid. If the reset switch continues to be operated, it is highly likely that the reset switch is being operated abnormally (unauthorizedly), and the game is made impossible to proceed. In addition, if the game is enabled to proceed, at least the game is configured to be able to be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game, or if there is a malfunction but it does not interfere with the game. Since there is no error, a configuration may be adopted in which the game can be continued until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel once an error occurs).

Furthermore, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects an operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the above-mentioned process 1 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the settlement switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the settlement switch. does not execute the specified process based on the payment switch when it detects the operation of the payment switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the payment switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch during the validity period of the payment switch. The configuration is such that a predetermined process is executed based on the payment switch.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch detects that it is valid, it is likely that the reset switch is operating normally, and the game can be settled. If the reset switch continues to be operated, it is highly likely that the reset switch is being operated abnormally (unauthorizedly), and payment for the game is made impossible. In addition, if payment for a game is enabled, the configuration is such that at least payment for the game can be executed, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from playing after payment, or even if it is a malfunction. Since there is no problem with the game, a configuration may be adopted in which the game can be continued until an error occurs (because once an error occurs, it is difficult to cancel).

Furthermore, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the configuration of the MAX bet switch can all be replaced with a 1 bet switch. Furthermore, if the various main switches are detected to be invalid when the replay symbol combination of the replay winning game is displayed (more specifically, from the third stop reception until the automatic bet process is executed), the MAX The automatic bet process is configured to be executed even if a predetermined process based on the bet switch is not executed. This is because if the automatic bet process is stopped, the game cannot be finished, and even if the settlement switch is enabled, the period of validity of the settlement switch cannot be reached and the settlement process cannot be executed. This is to prevent

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, both a MAX bet switch and a 1 bet switch may be provided, or only a MAX bet switch may be provided. If only the MAX bet switch is provided, processing related to one bet cannot be executed by the main switch, but it can be realized by inserting one medal by care.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the settlement switch and the 1-bet switch may be used as a dual-purpose switch. In this case, a single press executes the function of a 1-bet switch, and a long press executes the function of a settlement switch. In addition, a single press means that in the input port check performed for each interrupt process, the Settlement/1 Bet switch is released (OFF) within 894ms (equivalent to the Settlement/1 Bet switch being turned ON 400 times in a row during the interrupt process). ), and a long press means that in the input port check that is executed for each interrupt processing, even if it exceeds 894ms (equivalent to the settlement/1 bet switch being turned ON 400 times in a row by the interrupt processing), the settlement/1 This means that the bet switch was operated (continued to be ON).

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, it may be possible to insert medals for maintenance. With this configuration, the blocker is no longer operated by operating the various main switches, so it is possible to reduce wear on the blocker motor caused by the player operating the blocker at an arbitrary opportunity. Further, even if three coins are inserted (a specified number of coins) for maintenance, the progress of the game can be stopped by disabling the operation of the start switch.

Furthermore, in the processing of the various main switches described above, automatic bet processing may be enabled even if processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled. With this configuration, any one of the various main switches can be pressed between the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination stops until the reels stop (more specifically, before the winning determination process). Even if the switch is detected to be invalid and the predetermined process based on the bet switch operation is not executed (invalid), the automatic bet process will be executed, so please check the state of the switch before executing the automatic bet process. Since there is no need to make any judgments, the program capacity can be reduced. Further, even if automatic bet processing is performed, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, from the time when the final stop operation is accepted at the timing when a minor prize is won and the symbol combination of the minor prize stops, until the reels stop (more specifically, before the winning determination process ), if any of the various main switches is detected to be invalid and the predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalid), the payout process can also be executed. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, from the final stop operation reception at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning a predetermined combination (replay, small win, bonus, etc.) stops until the reel stops (more specifically Specifically, if any of the various main switches is detected to be invalid during the period (before the winning determination process), the slip control is executed, and the progress of the game is then stopped after the winning determination process.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, when the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, the automatic bet processing may also be disabled. With this configuration, any one of the various main switches can be pressed between the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination stops until the reels stop (more specifically, before the winning determination process). When the switch is detected to be invalid and the predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalid), the automatic bet process is not executed, so the progress of the game can be stopped. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped when the main switch is operated illegally, and damage to the game parlor can be suppressed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, from the time when the final stop operation is accepted at the timing when a minor prize is won and the symbol combination of the minor prize stops, until the reels stop (more specifically, before the winning determination process ), if any of the various main switches is detected to be invalid and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalid), the payout process is also impossible to execute. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, from the final stop operation reception at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning a predetermined combination (replay, small win, bonus, etc.) stops until the reel stops (more specifically Specifically, if any of the various main switches is detected to be invalid during the period (before the winning determination process), the slip control will be executed, and then the progress of the game will be stopped before the winning determination process. .

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, if the various main switches are detected to be valid and another main switch is operated, it will be considered valid only once (predetermined processing based on the other main switches can be executed). Good too. For example, when the reset switch is valid and the start switch sensor detects the start switch operation during the start switch validity period, a predetermined process based on the start switch can be executed. The predetermined processing based on the above information is made impossible. With this configuration, even if the start switch sensor picks up noise and remains in a continuous ON state for a minimal period, the next operation will only be valid once, so the game can proceed. If it is a noise, the continuation ON state is canceled and the predetermined process based on the next operation (in the above example, the stop switch) can be executed and the game can proceed. If it is not a noise, the continuation ON state is maintained and the game can proceed. The predetermined process based on the next operation (stop switch in the above example) becomes impossible to execute, and the game cannot proceed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly even if noise occurs.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the valid period during which the reset switch is valid may be set to the door open detection state and the error detection state (an error is occurring). In other words, when the reset switch is turned ON in the door open detection state and error detection state, the reset switch is valid detection, and when the reset switch is turned ON in the door closed detection state and error detection state, it is reset. The switch is detected to be invalid.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if a certain main switch is valid, if the input of a certain main switch and another main switch is detected at the same time, the operation reception of a certain main switch is disabled. In this case, the predetermined process may not be executed even during the validity period. For example, when the specified number of bets is placed, the start switch is valid, but when the specified number of bets is placed and the bet switch is detected as invalid, the start switch operation becomes invalid. (For example, processes 1, 2, and 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity). Even in such a case, when the bet switch is no longer detected, the operation acceptance of the start switch becomes valid, so this is set as the valid period of the start switch. In other words, the "valid period" does not indicate the period during which the operation of the main switch is valid in any state, but is used as the period during which the operation of the main switch itself is valid. In addition, although the example of the validity period of the start switch is described above, the same intention applies to the validity period of the other main switches (MAX bet switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch, reset switch). I am using it.

<Configuration related to passage of medals applicable to this example>
(Structure of medal selector)
The structure of the medal selector will be explained. The medal selector is provided to switch whether the medals inserted from the medal slot are guided into the gaming machine (inside the hopper) or out of the gaming machine (into the tray). In addition, a plurality of sensors are provided in the medal selector to detect the medals that have passed, and the medals inserted from the medal slot are configured so that they pass through the passage sensor, input sensor 1, and input sensor 2 in this order from upstream. has been done. Furthermore, a blocker is provided between the passage sensor and the input sensor 1, and when the blocker is ON, the inserted medals are guided into the gaming machine, and when the blocker is OFF, the inserted medals are guided outside the gaming machine. lead In addition, when introducing medals outside the gaming machine, if medals cannot be stored (credit storage limit (50) and MAX bet is placed (3)), or if non-standard medals are inserted (medals (including those that are not), the game is in progress (from accepting the start switch to the end of the game after all reels have stopped), there is an error, the settings are being checked, or the payment is being made. etc. are applicable.

When the passage sensor detects a medal (when it changes from OFF to ON), the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1. Further, the value of the input monitoring counter is cleared (set to 0) when the blocker is turned on from OFF. Further, the value of the input monitoring counter is decremented by 1 when the input sensor 2 changes from ON to OFF if the passing time and order of passage of input sensors 1 and 2 are normal. In other words, when a normal medal is inserted and led into the gaming machine, the value of the insertion monitoring counter is 0 because it is incremented by 1 when the passage sensor is detected and subtracted by 1 when the insertion sensor 2 is detected. If the value of the input monitoring counter is within the range of 0 to 2, it is assumed that the game medals have passed normally and a process is executed to turn on the input number display LED. However, if the replay is won and automatic bet processing is being executed, the process of lighting up the number of inserted coins display LED will not be newly executed, and the process of adding to the number of credits display (including the addition display process) will not be executed. Execute (if credits are less than 50). Note that the input monitoring counter is incremented when the blocker is OFF, but is cleared when the blocker is turned ON, so it does not substantially function when the blocker is OFF.

When the input sensor 1 detects a medal (changes from OFF to ON), it starts measuring the passing time until the input sensor 1 no longer detects a medal (from ON to OFF). If this passing time is within the threshold value, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold value, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold value from when the input sensor 1 turns ON to when the input sensor 1 turns OFF is set at 4 ms or more and within 200 ms in consideration of the medal passing speed.

If the input sensor 2 detects a medal after the input sensor 1 detects a medal (from when it changes from OFF to ON until it turns OFF), if the input sensor 2 detects a medal (when it changes from OFF to ON), the input sensor 1 Start measuring the passing time until no medals are detected (from ON to OFF). If this passing time (time from input sensor 2 turning ON to input sensor 1 turning OFF) is within the threshold value, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold value, it is judged as a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is performed. Execute. The threshold value from when the input sensor 2 is turned ON to when the input sensor 1 is turned OFF is set to 2 ms or more and 120 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

If the input sensor 2 detects a medal after the input sensor 1 detects a medal (from when it changes from OFF to ON until it turns OFF), if the input sensor 2 detects a medal (when it changes from OFF to ON), the input sensor 2 Start measuring the passing time until no medals are detected (from ON to OFF). If this passing time (the time from when the input sensor 2 turns ON to when the input sensor 2 turns OFF) is within the threshold value, it is normal, but when it exceeds the threshold value, it is judged as a medal retention error, and the medal retention error process is performed. Execute. The threshold value from when the input sensor 2 turns ON to when the input sensor 2 turns OFF is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the medal passing speed.

If the input sensor 2 detects a medal (changes from OFF to ON) before the input sensor 1 detects a medal (before it changes from OFF to ON), it is determined that there is a medal backflow error, and the medal is Perform backflow error handling.

The input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are arranged so that they may both be turned on when one medal passes (the distance between the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 is shorter than the diameter of the medal). , is configured to be able to execute error processing according to the passage time of the medal.

When medals are inserted through the medal slot, they fall freely through the passage in the selector and are guided to the hopper. If the time from when medals are inserted until they are guided to the hopper is too short, the blocker will not be turned on in time, and the inserted medals will be guided to the return path. In addition, if the time from the time the medals are inserted to the time they are guided to the hopper is too long, the time it takes to insert the medals to start the game will be longer than necessary, so the time required for the medals to pass from the time the medals are inserted until the time they are guided to the hopper is longer than necessary. must be set at an appropriate time. There are various possible actions for inserting medals from the medal slot, but as shown in Figure 51, the medals are set at the top of the medal slot (the initial velocity is 0 when the medal is set), and the artificial In this embodiment, the action of freely falling the medals without applying any acceleration will be described as a general medal insertion action. Further, after the medal is allowed to fall freely, it may collide with various parts within the selector, and the term "free fall" includes the deceleration caused by this collision.

The condition for the blocker to turn from OFF to ON is after one game is completed. More specifically, after the winning process has been executed due to all the reels being stopped and all the stop switches being released in the previous game, the game start display LED (start lamp), which is the information of the previous game, After initializing the RWM storage area regarding the input display LEDs (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) and the replay display LED (replay lamp), the blocker is turned on.

Here, if the player's goal is to play as much as possible during the business hours of the gaming parlor where he or she is playing, in order to play the game continuously, It is conceivable to perform an action to immediately execute the next game. For this operation, if medals are stored in the credits, operate the bet switch (MAX bet switch) and then operate the start switch, and if there are no medals stored in the credits, insert the specified number of medals from the medal slot ( In this embodiment, after inserting three sheets, the start switch is operated. The shorter the time it takes to perform this action, the more games can be played, so if the inserted medals are not guided to the hopper but to the return path, it will take longer to play the next game. This may reduce the interest of the game, such as making the player feel that the operability is poor.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in a situation where medals can be inserted, it is preferable that when medals are inserted from the medal slot, they are guided to the hopper as much as possible.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this example, when the last reel is rotating among the plurality of reels (three reels in this embodiment), the stop switch corresponding to the last reel is pressed. When the stop switch is operated in a situation where the operation is valid, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last reel detects the operation of the stop switch, starts the process of stopping the last reel, and then When the stop switch sensor no longer detects the operation of the stop switch and medals are inserted from the medal slot, the inserted medals are guided to the hopper (processing to turn the blocker from OFF to ON is executed It is configured so that it may be

This makes it possible to insert medals after the end of the game, and also makes it easier for the player to know when the medals can be inserted (the medals can be inserted the moment the last stop switch is released), which improves the operation of the game. can be executed quickly.

To avoid redundancy in the following explanation, the time from the moment when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch turns OFF until the blocker is turned ON is referred to as "T1", and the time from when the medal is inserted through the medal slot ( When the medal slot is viewed from the front, the bottom of the medal is aligned with the top of the medal slot (directly above the medal slot and the entire medal is visible) until it reaches the blocker. The time will be explained as "T2".

In addition, in cases where a loss (including a missed win of a small combination in the pressing order), a 1-card winning combination, a 10-card winning combination, a replay, or a bonus can be selected as a result of the internal drawing by the internal drawing means, any of the internal drawings may be selected. Even in the case of a result, the medal may be configured to be guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released.

In this case, payout processing (processing that gives medals to the player), automatic bet processing (automatic bet processing when replay symbol combinations are displayed), or display freeze processing (bonus T1 including the processing time (freeze processing after displaying the symbol combination) is made shorter than T2 (T1<T2).

With this configuration, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, when medals are inserted, the timing of introducing the medals into the hopper is the same, allowing the player to play the game without disturbing the tempo of the game. I can do it.

In addition, in a game that resulted in an internal lottery with 10 winning combinations, if the last stop switch is pressed (operation accepted) and is continued to be pressed after that, "Last stop switch pressed → Last reel" It may be structured as follows: "stops → pays out 10 game medals". In other words, instead of paying out game medals based on the symbol combination that stopped when the stop switch was released, game medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that stopped when the stop switch was pressed (accepting the operation). It may be configured to execute the payout, and in such a configuration, the medals are guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the stop switch is pressed (operation is accepted). It's okay.

In addition, in the case where the internal lottery by the internal lottery means is configured so that a loss (including a missed winning of a small combination in the pressing order), a 1-card combination, a 10-card combination, a replay, or a bonus can be selected, a loss, or When a one-card winning combination is selected, the medal may be guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released.

In this case, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch was turned OFF, including the processing time of the payout process (process of giving one medal to the player) that is executed after the last stop switch is released. Set T1a, which is the time from the moment the blocker is turned on, to be shorter than T2 (T1a<T2), and perform automatic bet processing (automatic bet processing when displaying replay symbol combinations) or display freeze processing (display bonus symbol combinations). Set T1b, which is the time from the moment when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch turns OFF to when the blocker is turned ON, including the processing time of the freeze processing (after freezing), to be longer than T2 (T1b>T2 ).

If the system is configured so that the medals are introduced into the hopper at the moment when the last stop switch is released for all internal lottery results, the number of medals to be paid out is 1 and 10. This is because the time design is the same even if the number of coins to be paid out is the same, so time is lost when the number of coins to be paid out is one. Therefore, by configuring T1a<T2 only when the number of payouts is one and the processing is shorter than that (no payout), it is possible to reduce time loss and speed up the player's playing time. can.

In addition, in the case where the result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means is a loss (including a missed win of a small combination in the push order), a 1-card winning combination, a 10-card winning combination, a replay, or a bonus, the internal lottery by the internal lottery method may be selected. As a result, the probability of selecting a loss or a 1-card combination is designed to be higher than the selection probability of a 10-card combination, a replay, or a bonus. Then, it may be configured such that the medals are guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment when the last stop switch is released only when a loss or a one-card winning combination is selected.

This is an event that the player has a high probability of encountering while playing the game (a hand with a high probability of winning), and by designing T1 < T2 for the internal lottery result where the processing time for winning is short. Considering the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to efficiently execute the number of games.

As a specific example regarding T1 and T2 mentioned above, if the average speed at which a medal (diameter 25 mm, weight 5 g) passes through the selector after being inserted from the medal slot is set to approximately 0.6 mm/ms, the medal When the medals inserted into the slot are led to the hopper, the distance from the medal slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 60 mm, and the time from the medal slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 90 ms. When designing in this way, it is desirable to design T2 to be 90ms and T1 to be less than 90ms, but the present invention is not limited to this, and T2 can be adjusted by adjusting the distance within the selector and the speed at which the medal passes through the selector. It is conceivable that the design value changes and the design value of T1 is changed accordingly.

In addition, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and the internal lottery results in winnings (including missed winnings of small winnings in the pressing order), 1-card winning, 10-card winning, replay, or When a bonus is won, as mentioned above, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation detects the stop switch operation and accepts the stop switch operation, and then the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation detects the stop switch operation. As explained above, if a medal is inserted from the medal slot when the operation is no longer detected, the state of the blocker will be ON when the medal reaches the blocker. When the operation is detected, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and the internal lottery results in a win (including a missed win for the small winning combination), a 1-card winning combination, a 10-card winning combination, a replay, or a bonus. If a medal is inserted from the medal slot at the timing when the rotation start process (process to rotate all reels) is started, the state of the blocker is OFF when the medal reaches the blocker, so at that timing Even if the stop switch is operated as soon as possible after medals are inserted, the medals will reach the blocker before the blocker is turned on, and the medals will be guided out of the machine (to the tray). .

<Configuration regarding reel unit applicable to this example>
The reel unit R008 applicable to this example will be described using FIG. 52. The reel unit R008 is mainly composed of a reel frame R001, a left reel R002, a middle reel R003, and a right reel R004.The reel frame R001 has a left reel R002, a middle reel R003, and a right reel R004 connected to the reel bottom screw. It is fixed via R006. After the reel unit R008 is installed on the reel mounting portion of the housing, the top and bottom are fixed with the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007.

Further, each reel (left reel R002, middle reel R003, right reel R004) may be fixed to the reel frame R001 at the top and bottom, and in that case, the reel lower screw R006 and the reel unit upper screw R007 are used. Each reel may be configured to be fixed to the reel frame R001.

In addition, when fixing each reel to the reel frame R001 by providing a reel top screw (not shown) in addition to the reel unit top screw R007, fix the reel with the reel bottom screw R006 and the reel top screw (not shown). When fixing the unit R008 to the housing, it may be configured to be fixed using a reel unit lower screw R005 and a reel unit upper screw R007.

When viewed from the front, the rightmost reel lower screw R006 transmits the impact of the door closing more easily than the other reel lower screws R006, so if the right reel lower screw R006 falls off, it will not fall into the hopper. With the right reel lower screw R006 fixed to the reel unit R008, the right reel lower screw R006 is arranged directly above the flow path leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank. That is, if the right reel lower screw R006 comes off due to some malfunction, the right reel lower screw R006 will fall into the channel leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank.

This makes it possible to prevent hopper failure caused by the right reel lower screw R006 entering the hopper, and also prevents the right reel lower screw R006 from entering the hopper because it will flow into the auxiliary tank when the right reel lower screw R006 falls off. You can reduce lost opportunities.

Furthermore, the reel unit upper screw R007 on the rightmost side when viewed from the front is also more likely to fall off because the impact caused by the door closing is transmitted more easily than the other reel unit upper screws R007. Therefore, the width of the space created at the top of the right reel R004 and the bottom of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in Figure 52) to prevent the right reel unit upper screw R007 from entering the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off. is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) (the relationship between A and B in FIG. 52 is A<B). With this configuration, when the right reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, it can be made difficult to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

The above-mentioned relationship is not limited to the right reel, but is also common to the middle reel and the left reel, and the ease with which the reel unit upper screw falls off differs for each reel unit upper screw, but in reality, the reel unit upper screw falls off easily. After falling off, all reels and reel unit upper screws have the same configuration and effect.

Thereby, when the right reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, it can be prevented from entering the inside of the reel unit R008. If the right reel unit top screw R007 gets inside the reel unit R008, it will affect the rotation of the reel (the right reel unit top screw R007 may damage the reel or hinder the rotation of the reel. Therefore, it is necessary to immediately remove the reel unit upper screw R007 from inside the reel unit R008, but since the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, remove the reel unit R008 from the housing before doing the work. I won't be able to do without it. In this way, if the right reel unit upper screw R007 gets inside the reel unit R008, it will take a long time to restart the game, so in this example, the reel unit upper screw R007 It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the inside of R008.

Further, the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the transverse direction (corresponding to C in FIG. 52) may be made longer than the width A of the space created between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

Note that when each reel is installed in reel unit R008, the front part of each reel (the part closest to the player) is closer to the front side than the front part of reel frame R001 (the part closest to the player). Because of this, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel. If the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel, the reel unit upper screw R007 may rebound and enter the inside of the reel unit R008, potentially going to the rear of the reel unit R008. In particular, if the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the top surface of the reel during reverse rotation (the reel rotates from the bottom to the top), the possibility that the reel unit R008 will bounce backward increases. In order to prevent this situation, the above-described configuration makes it difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

In order to prevent the right reel unit upper screw R007 from falling into the reel unit R008, the width of the space created between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in Fig. 52) is set in the reel unit. Even if the length in the longitudinal direction of the upper screw R007 is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in Fig. 52) (the relationship between A and B in Fig. 52 is A<B), the reel unit upper screw R007 There is a possibility that it may get inside R008. Even in this case, the reel R002 is configured to be prevented from being damaged by rotating the reel R002 while the reel unit upper screw R007 remains inside the reel unit R008.

FIG. 53 is a diagram of the reel unit R008 viewed from the right side. The reel R002 is attached to the reel unit R008, the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, and the front panel R013 is closed.

If the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and enters the reel unit R008 in this state, the dropped reel unit upper screw R007 rolls on the reel R002. Reel unit rear upper opening R009 and reel unit rear lower opening R010 are provided below the highest point of reel R002, and the vertical length of the openings of reel unit rear upper opening R009 and reel unit rear lower opening R010 (corresponding to E and F in Figure 53) are configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in Figure 53), so the upper part of the reel unit that has rolled on reel R002 The screw R007 is discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (configured to be easily discharged). This prevents the reel unit upper screw R007 from remaining stuck inside the reel unit R008, thereby preventing damage to the reel R002.

Regarding the lengths of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010, the length in the lateral direction is also longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in Fig. 53). Therefore, the reel unit upper screw R007 is configured to be easily discharged from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

In addition, the opening size of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 may be larger, and if B<E and B<F hold true, B<E<F, B< Either F<E or B<E=F may be satisfied. Note that B and F may be the length in the vertical direction, the length in the lateral direction, or the area of the openings of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Further, the shortest distance between the frontmost part of the reel R002 and the front panel R013 (corresponding to D in FIG. 53) is configured to be longer than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007. As a result, if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off to the front of the reel, it will fall downward without being caught between the reel R002 and the front panel R013, making it difficult for the reel unit upper screw to damage the reel R002 when it falls. Become. In particular, strong force is applied when reel R002 is rotating, so even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off in such a case, the reel unit upper screw will not easily damage reel R002, and will prevent the rotation of reel R002. It can be configured so as not to interfere.

In addition, the relationship between the frontmost part of each reel and the frontmost part of the hopper installed at the bottom of the housing is that the frontmost part of each reel protrudes further forward than the frontmost part of the hopper. Even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls in front of the reel unit R008 and is guided toward the lower part of the casing, it is difficult to enter the hopper. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hopper from breaking down due to the reel unit upper screw R007 entering the hopper.

Further, a central display board R011 is attached to the rear of the front panel R013. The central display board R011 is controlled by a main control board, and various front main control devices (1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, It controls the display of the medal input ready lamp, credit number display, payout number display) and the rear main control device (setting value display) attached to the rear of the front panel R013.

A center display board protection cover R012 that protects the center display board R011 is attached to the center display board R011. The central display board protective cover R012 is made of transparent resin and ensures the visibility of the central display board R011.

The upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is sloped downward toward the rear. When the front panel R013 is closed, the shortest distance between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 (corresponding to G in Fig. 54) is determined by the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007. is also longer (B<G relationship).

With these configurations, if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls forward, the reel unit upper screw R007 will fall off the center display board R011 because the center display board R011 is protected by the center display board protection cover R012. In addition, since the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is slanted, it is possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 downward, and the reel R002 and the central display can be prevented from being damaged. Since the shortest distance G from the top of the board protection cover R012 is longer than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007, the reel unit upper screw R007 guides the reel R002 downward into the housing without damaging it. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the top of the central display board protective cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship B>G). The shortest distance G from the top of the protective cover R012 may be configured to be longer than the length C of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the width direction (relationship C<G). In this case, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the top of the central display board protective cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit top screw R007, so there is a possibility of the reel getting caught, but the reel unit top screw R007 Since it is longer than the length C in the lateral direction, it is possible to suppress the possibility of getting caught. Therefore, even when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, it becomes difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to damage the reel R002, and it becomes possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 below the casing while preventing damage.

Furthermore, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the top of the center display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship B>G), and the reel R002 and the center display board protection The shortest distance G from the top of the cover R012 may be configured to be shorter than the length C of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the lateral direction (relationship C>G). In this case, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is caught between the reel R002 and the central display board protective cover R012 and stops, so the reel unit upper screw R007 can be seen from the door closed state, and the reel unit It becomes easy to see that the upper screw R007 has fallen off, and since the whereabouts of the reel unit upper screw R007 can be visually confirmed, the reel unit upper screw R007 can be easily recovered.

Further, a plurality of reel unit rear upper openings R009 and reel unit rear lower openings R010 may be provided corresponding to each reel. In other words, the rear of the left reel is equipped with the reel unit rear upper opening left and the reel unit rear lower opening left, and the rear of the middle reel is equipped with the reel unit rear upper opening middle and the reel unit rear lower opening middle. At the rear of the right reel, a right rear upper opening of the reel unit and a right rear lower opening of the reel unit are provided. With this configuration, a reel unit rear upper opening R009 and a reel unit rear lower opening R010 are provided to accommodate the falling off of the reel unit upper screw R007 corresponding to each reel, and which reel unit upper screw R007 Even if the reel falls off and enters the inside rear of the reel unit R008, it can be discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Further, the rear of the reel unit R008 may be entirely open. With such a configuration, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 rolls backward inside the reel unit R008, the rear of the reel unit R008 is not closed. It is discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 without being caught.

<Configuration related to display of instruction information applicable to this example>
In the advantageous section, an AT lottery is executed as a process related to the instruction function, and when the AT lottery is won and the game state is such that AT can be executed, the first stop left reel is correct and the second stop is the result of the internal lottery. When the center reel correct pressing order winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the left middle right pushing winning combination) is won, processing is executed to notify the player of the pushing order corresponding to the left middle right pushing winning combination. In addition, when the left-center-right pressing order combination is operated in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination (which may consist of multiple symbol combinations) is always displayed and gives the player an advantageous payout (for example, 10 pieces). If the button is pressed in the wrong order, the correct symbol combination (which may consist of multiple symbol combinations) will not be displayed and the player will not be able to receive an advantageous payout. A combination is displayed and a disadvantageous payout (for example, 1 piece) is given to the player, or a losing symbol combination is displayed and no payout is given to the player).

The notification processing when the left-center-right push winning combination is won is roughly divided into four notification means. The first is an instruction monitor (the order of pressing is displayed on the acquired number display 27 shown in FIG. 21), the second is a liquid crystal display (display device 32 shown in FIG. 21), and the third is a display device 32 shown in FIG. The eyes are lamps (left operation instruction lamp 24a, middle operation instruction lamp 24b, and right operation instruction lamp 24c shown in FIG. 21), and the fourth is a speaker (speaker S shown in FIG. 21).

The instruction monitor is the same as described above, and the main control means uses a 7-segment display to notify the pressing order. The instruction monitor executes dynamic lighting control, and digit 1 is the stored number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (1000th digit), and digit 2 is the stored number display LED (lower digit) and ratio display. It is a display LED (100th place digit), digit 3 is an acquisition number display LED (upper digit) and a ratio display LED (10th place digit), and digit 4 is an acquisition number display LED (lower digit), a ratio display LED. (1st digit) and an advantageous section display LED, and digit 5 is an input number display LED, a game start display LED, an input display LED, a re-game display LED, and a setting display LED. Since the instruction monitor in this embodiment also serves as the acquired number display, it is displayed when the digit is 4 (when "=" is displayed, it is displayed when the digit is 3).

The lighting of each digit is switched for each interrupt processing, and after digit 4 is turned on, the next time digit 4 is turned on is after the 5th interrupt (11.175 ms). In other words, a different location is lit for each interrupt. Note that since the light is blinking at a high speed, it can appear to the player that the light is always on due to the afterimage.

When notifying the push order on the LCD, in a situation where all the reels are spinning when the left-center-right push winning combination is won in an advantageous section, an image will be displayed as "123", and then the left stop switch will be pressed. After the switch is operated, an image of "_23" (_ is a blank) is displayed, and after the middle stop switch is operated, an image of "__3" (_ is a blank) is displayed. Also, in order to emphasize the information corresponding to the stop switch that is currently being operated, when "123" is displayed, "1" is displayed larger than "2" and "3" so that the player can understand. It is easy to inform. Similarly, for "_23" and "__3", the image display corresponding to the stop button to be operated currently is displayed in a large size. In addition, if the left stop switch is operated in a situation where the image "123" is displayed and the image is displayed as "_23" (_ is blank), the image display corresponding to the left stop button is This will change from "1" to blank, but in this case, it may be configured to include an effect (for example, an effect such as an explosion) when erasing the "1" image.

In addition, the liquid crystal is controlled by a sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives a press order information command regarding the left-center-right press order transmitted from the main control board, it acquires the command by reception interrupt processing, The command acquired by the command analysis process of the main loop processing of the sub control board is analyzed, and if it is determined as a push order command as a result of the command analysis, image data related to the corresponding push order is obtained from the image table and the liquid crystal is controlled. The image control board executes the drawing process by sending the acquired image data command to the image control board. Note that the sub-control board and the image control board may be composed of one board, but even in this case, the control unit corresponding to the sub-control board and the control unit corresponding to the image control board can be connected via commands. information transmission.

Regarding lamps, this includes the middle panel lamp that covers the front of the reel and the frame lamp at the top of the front panel. As for the middle panel lamp, it is provided above, below, or both above and below each reel, and it corresponds to the left reel when all reels are spinning when the left-center-right press winning combination is won in an advantageous section. Then, after the left stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the middle reel is lit, and after the middle stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the right reel is lit. Turn on panel lamp R. In this way, by notifying the reel to be stopped now, the corresponding stop switch can be stopped. In addition, there is no problem in changing the shape and position of the middle panel lamp as appropriate, and the lighting mode can also be changed, so when the middle panel lamp L is lit, the lamp corresponding to the left reel is lit. It suffices if the player can recognize that the player is in the middle panel (the same applies to the middle panel lamp C and the middle panel lamp R).

Regarding the frame lamps, the frame lamp L on the left side of the case, the frame lamp C on the upper center of the case, and the frame lamp R on the right side of the case can be made to correspond to the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch, respectively. It is possible to notify the pressing order in the same way as a panel lamp.

In addition, the middle panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives a press order information command regarding the left, center, right press order sent from the main control board, the reception interrupt processing is performed. The command is acquired by the command analysis process of the main loop processing of the sub-control board, and if it is determined to be a press order command as a result of the command analysis, the lamps for the corresponding press order are lit from the lamp pattern table. By acquiring the data and transmitting the acquired lamp lighting data command to each lamp board, the corresponding lamp board executes lighting control according to the lighting data.

As for the speakers, there are an upper speaker L on the left side of the upper part of the housing, an upper speaker R on the right side of the upper part of the housing, and a lower speaker on the lower part of the housing. If the left-center-right correct press combination is won, a process is performed to output a voice saying "left" from the upper speakers L and R before the stop switch becomes effective. Then, after the player presses the left stop switch, a process is performed to output a voice saying "Inside". Then, after the player presses the middle stop switch, a process is performed to output a voice saying "Right."

In addition, the middle panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives a press order information command regarding the left, center, right press order sent from the main control board, the reception interrupt processing is performed. acquires the command, analyzes the command acquired by the command analysis process of the main loop processing of the sub control board, and if it is determined as a press order command as a result of command analysis, acquires the corresponding voice data from the voice table, Audio is output from the speaker by sending the acquired audio data command to the audio board that controls the speaker.

The interrupt processing executed by the sub control board is executed every 1 ms, which is shorter than the interval of 2.235 ms of the interrupt processing of the main control board. Furthermore, when a command is received from the main control board, the command is acquired preferentially by generating a reception interrupt. This allows the performance to be controlled without missing commands from the main control board.

(About the processing of various notification means when the push order is incorrect)
Regarding the instruction monitor, in a situation where the left-center-right push order is won and the pressing order is displayed on the instruction monitor (for example, "=1" is displayed on the instruction monitor), the middle stop switch is first operated to stop. If the stop switch is pressed in a different order than the correct order, the instruction monitor will continue to be displayed, and after the last stop switch is accepted when all reels have stopped. , when the last stop switch is released, the display is initialized (it turns off). After that, if an incorrect symbol combination is displayed, "1" indicating the number of payouts is displayed. That is, when the left-center-right press winning combination is won and "=1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, if the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, After that, the display on the instruction monitor maintains "=1", but even if the middle stop switch is operated to stop, which is an incorrect stop operation for the first stop, the display on the instruction monitor will continue to display "=1". maintain.

Regarding the LCD, if the middle stop switch is stopped first in a situation where the left-center-right press is won and the pressing order is displayed on the LCD (for example, "123" is displayed on the LCD), At that point, control is performed so that the full press order information on the liquid crystal display is not displayed. In other words, when the left-center-right press winning combination is won and "123" is displayed on the LCD, if the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, then the LCD On the other hand, if the middle stop switch, which is incorrect as the stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, all LCD displays (displays regarding the order of presses) will be cleared. becomes.

Regarding the lamp, in a situation where the left-center-right pressing order is won and the pressing order is displayed on the lamp (for example, the middle panel lamp L is lit, or the frame lamp L is lit), the middle stop switch is stopped first. If this happens, do not turn on the middle panel lamp L or the frame lamp L at that point. In other words, when the left-center-right press winning combination is won and the middle panel lamp L is lit (or the frame lamp L is lit), the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop. If the middle panel lamp C lights up (or the frame lamp C lights up), if the middle stop switch is operated incorrectly as the first stop, then the middle panel lamp C lights up (or the frame lamp C lights up). The panel lamp (or frame lamp C) will not be lit.

Regarding the speaker, after the left-center-right push order is won and the pressing order is announced by voice, it will not be repeatedly announced, so even if the middle stop switch is stopped for the first time, a new voice will be issued. No output. In other words, when the left-center-right press winning combination is won, if the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, the speaker then outputs a voice saying "Inside." On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed on the middle stop switch, which is incorrect as the first stop operation, then the speaker will not output audio regarding the push order.

(Press order notification timing based on start switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operation, the left, middle, right press order is won, and the timing for displaying the press order information on the instruction monitor is the reel rotation start process (acceleration process for all reels). It is conceivable to execute display processing immediately before. With such a configuration, acceleration processing is executed as the drum rotation start processing, then constant speed processing is executed, and then the operation of the stop switch is enabled, so the player must press the stop switch before operating it. Order information can be displayed.

Also, when notifying the push order using the liquid crystal, lamp, or speaker, it cannot be executed unless information is received from the main control board, so it is necessary to start executing the notification process before the drum rotation start process. Specifically, after the push order combination is won, the main control board processes the push order command, then sends the push order command, and the sub control board receives the push order command. Execute.

In this way, it is better to execute the drum rotation start processing as a processing of the main control board, which is the starting point of the notification on the instruction monitor, which is the starting point of the processing related to the push order notification. The processing timing is later than the pressing order command set processing as the processing of the main control board, which is the starting point of the notification. However, in reality, the overall processing time for the processing executed on the main control board is shorter than the processing executed on the sub-control board after sending the push order command to the sub-control board, so the wait period has elapsed. If the start switch is operated after the start switch is pressed, the system is configured so that the push order can be notified earlier on the instruction monitor than when the push order is notified through the liquid crystal, lamp, and speaker. With this configuration, the press order information managed by the most reliable main control board can be announced first, and then the press order information managed by the sub control board can be announced as supplementary information. , the player can easily recognize the press order information managed by the most reliable main control board, and the possibility that the press order will be incorrect due to the player's operations can be reduced.

(If the start switch is operated after the wait period has passed)
Next, a situation in which the start switch is operated after the wait period has elapsed and the left-center-right push winning combination is won will be described in detail.

As a result of an internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operated after the wait period measured from the previous game has passed (4.1 seconds have elapsed) during the advantageous period, the left center If the right pressing winning combination is won, the command corresponding to the left-center-right pressing winning combination is stored in the command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command buffer is stored by the command sending processing executed by the interrupt processing of the main control board. Send the commands stored in the at any time.

After storing the command corresponding to the left-center-right press in the command buffer in the main loop processing of the main control board, it is determined whether the wait time has elapsed (in this situation, the wait time has already elapsed, so After that, when it is determined that the wait period has elapsed, the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of RWM, and the instruction monitor lighting process is executed by interrupt processing of the main control board. At this point, the RWM address where the instruction number is stored is acquired, and the instruction monitor is turned on. After the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM in the main loop processing of the main control board, processing for accelerating all reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if you execute the lighting control of the instruction monitor after storing the command corresponding to the left-center-right press in the command buffer, the wait period has elapsed (or the remaining wait period remains). (in a situation where there are extremely few cases), the push order display on the instruction monitor can be notified before the push order display on other sub-control boards.

(If the start switch is operated before the wait period has elapsed)
Next, a situation in which the start switch is operated before the wait period elapses and the left-center-right push winning combination is won will be described in detail.

If the internal lottery is executed based on the acceptance of the start switch operated during the advantageous period and before the wait period measured from the previous game has elapsed, the left-center-right press winning combination is won. The main loop processing of the main control board stores the command corresponding to the left-center-right pressing order role in the command buffer, and the command transmission processing executed by the main control board's interrupt processing sends the commands stored in the command buffer at any time. do.

After storing the command corresponding to the left-center-right press in the command buffer in the main loop processing of the main control board, it is determined whether the wait time has elapsed (in this situation, the wait time has not elapsed, so After that, the determination process is repeated until the wait period has elapsed, and when it is determined that the wait period has elapsed, the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of RWM. In the instruction monitor lighting process executed by the interrupt process of the main control board, the RWM address where the instruction number is stored is acquired and the instruction monitor is turned on. After the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM in the main loop processing of the main control board, processing for accelerating all reels is executed.

With this configuration, even if you execute the lighting control of the instruction monitor after storing the command corresponding to the left-center-right press in the command buffer, if the situation is before the wait period has elapsed, the instruction monitor will not turn on. It is possible to notify the push order display on other sub-control boards before the push order display on other sub-control boards.

It is better to notify the display on the instruction monitor as early as possible, but if it is too early, the anticipation after the start switch is operated will be lost. It would be more interesting to play the game if the lottery for AT is not performed immediately after operating the start switch (because you would know that you have won the small winning combination in the push order, which is unlikely to occur), and the notification is announced after a certain period of time after operating the start switch. based on being effective in improving For this reason, the instruction monitor is configured to display in time with the reel rotation start process (acceleration process for all reels), but if the push order notification is too late, the push order will be different from the push order notified by the gaming machine. Since there is a possibility that the player may perform operations, the press order notified by the sub-control board is fixed regardless of the elapse of the wait period, so that the notification of the press order will not be too late at the start of the game before the wait period has elapsed. We will notify you in due time.

As a process on the sub-control board, when a left-center-right press order command is transmitted from the main control board, it is stored in the command reception buffer of the sub-control board. When the left-center-right press order command is stored in the command reception buffer, a reception interrupt process occurs, the received command is analyzed, and the analyzed command is saved (in this example, the left-center-right press order command is saved). ). It takes about 16ms from receiving a command to saving the command.

If you want to display the left-center-right correct image on the LCD, use the interrupt processing on the sub-control board to send the left-center-right press order command (a processed command may be used, but in this example, it is sent as is) to the image control board, and the image control When the board receives the left-center-right press order command, it selects the image corresponding to the left-center-right press order command from the image data table stored in the image control board, and starts drawing processing. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per image is approximately 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left-center-right press order command) stored on the sub-control board is sent to the image control board is 1 ms.

If you want to execute left correct answer notification using a lamp, select the lamp pattern that corresponds to the left-center-right press order command from the lamp data table stored in the sub-control board, and send it to the corresponding lamp board to execute lighting control. let Alternatively, the interrupt processing on the sub-control board sends the left-center-right push order command to the lamp board, and when the lamp board receives the left-center-right push order command, the left-center-right push order is read from the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. Select the lamp pattern corresponding to the command and execute lighting control. The time it takes to turn on the lamp after selecting a lamp pattern is approximately 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left-center-right press order command) stored on the sub-control board is sent to the lamp board is 1 ms.

If you want the left correct answer notification to be executed by the speaker, select the audio pattern that corresponds to the left-center-right press order command from the audio data table stored in the sub-control board, and send it to the corresponding speaker board to control the audio output. Let it run. Alternatively, a left-center-right press order command is sent to the speaker board by interrupt processing on the sub-control board, and when the speaker board receives the left-center-right press order command, the left-center-right press order is determined from the audio data table stored in the speaker board. A voice pattern corresponding to the command is selected and voice output control is executed. The time from when a sound pattern is selected to when the sound is output is approximately 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (voice pattern or left-center-right press order command) stored on the sub-control board is sent to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the above-described processing on the sub-control board side, the pressing order notification on the sub-control board side becomes the order of lamp, speaker, and liquid crystal. Although the notification processing timing for the lamp and speaker is approximately the same, due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, the lamp and speaker are often recognized in the order of the lamp and the speaker because of the speed of light and the speed of sound.

With this configuration, a lamp is used to notify the player at the earliest, which is easier for the player to focus on when starting the game, and then the speaker and LCD are used to make the notification easier to understand, making it easier for the player to understand the order in which they press the button. It can be prevented.

(Press order notification timing based on stop switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed when the start switch operation is accepted, the left-center-right press winning combination is won, and information about the correct operation mode for the left-center-right pressing combination is announced by the instruction monitor, liquid crystal, lamp, and speaker. In this situation, if the correct first stop operation (in this example, the first stop of the left stop switch) is accepted, the display on the instruction monitor will not change, but the press order notification mode by the LCD, lamp, and speaker will change. do.

As a result of the internal lottery executed when the start switch operation is accepted, the left-center-right press winning combination is won, and information about the correct operation mode for the left-center-right pressing combination is announced by the instruction monitor, liquid crystal, lamp, and speaker. In this situation, if the correct first stop operation (in this example, the left stop switch first stop) is accepted, the left stop switch acceptance command is stored in the command transmission buffer of the main control board. A left stop switch acceptance command is then sent to the sub control board in the interrupt processing of the main control board that occurs. When the sub control board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, it generates a reception interrupt process, analyzes the received command, and saves the analyzed command (in this example, the left stop switch acceptance command is saved). It takes about 16ms from receiving a command to saving the command.

When displaying the second middle stop image (highlighting the image "2" with "_23") on the LCD, use the left stop switch reception command (a processed command may be used, but in this example, it is used as is) in the interrupt processing on the sub-control board. When the image control board receives the left stop switch reception command, it selects the image corresponding to the left stop switch reception command from the image data table stored in the image control board and performs drawing processing. Start. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per image is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

If you want to execute the middle 2nd stop notification (turn off the left lamp and turn on the middle lamp) using the lamp, select the lamp pattern that corresponds to the left stop switch reception command from the lamp data table stored in the sub control board. Then, it is sent to the corresponding lamp board to execute lighting control. Alternatively, the left stop switch reception command is sent to the lamp board by interrupt processing on the sub-control board, and when the lamp board receives the left stop switch reception command, it matches the left stop switch reception command from the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. select the lamp pattern to be used and execute lighting control. The time it takes to turn on the lamp after selecting a lamp pattern is approximately 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is sent to the lamp board is 1 ms.

If you want to execute the middle 2nd stop notification (outputting the voice "Middle!") using the speaker, select the voice pattern that corresponds to the left stop switch reception command from the voice data table stored in the sub-control board, Send it to the corresponding speaker board to execute audio output control. Alternatively, a left stop switch reception command is sent to the speaker board through interrupt processing on the sub-control board, and when the speaker board receives the left stop switch reception command, it is found in the audio data table stored in the speaker board that it corresponds to the left stop switch reception command. select the audio pattern to perform audio output control. The time from when a sound pattern is selected to when the sound is output is approximately 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (audio pattern or left stop switch acceptance command) stored in the sub-control board is sent to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the above-described processing on the sub-control board side, the pressing order notification on the sub-control board side becomes the order of lamp, speaker, and liquid crystal. The notification processing timing for the lamp and speaker is almost the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, it may be configured so that the lamp and speaker are in the order that is easily recognized by the player, or the speaker, The configuration may be such that the order of the lamps is the same.

With this configuration, a lamp is used to notify the player at the earliest, which makes it easier for the player to focus on the start of the second stop operation, and then a speaker and a liquid crystal display are used to make it easier for the player to understand the push order. Mistakes in order can be prevented. In addition, in this example, the structure regarding the notification in the liquid crystal, lamp, and speaker in the first stop operation and the second stop operation is described in detail, but it is not limited to this, and the third stop can also be used as the second stop. There is no problem in applying a similar configuration.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the buttons used for performances such as the production button P381 and the sub switch 20 briefly explained in FIG. 1 are collectively referred to as production input buttons, and the basic structure regarding this production input button is shown in FIG. This will be explained using an operation diagram.

The basic structure of the effect input button 1000 is roughly divided into three parts: a push-down part 1010, an outer wall part 1020, and an internal structure part 1030.The other structure is that the effect input button 1000 is fixed to the gaming machine P. There are also a fixing part (not shown) for this purpose and a vibration generating part (not shown) for vibrating the entire effect input button, but their explanation will be omitted in this embodiment.

The outer wall portion 1020 has, for example, a cylindrical structure in the shape of an engine cylinder, and the inner diameter portion 2022 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the push-down portion 1010 so that the piston can operate smoothly after the push-down portion 1010 is installed. It consists of dimensions. In particular, when a vibration generating section is included, the clearance between the inner diameter section 1022 and the push-down section 1010 is set to be large in order to actively vibrate the push-down section 1010.

The push-down portion 1010 has a hollow cylindrical shape, like an engine piston, for example, and is mainly surrounded by an inner diameter portion 1022 of an outer wall portion 1020 and combined with the outer diameter portion 1012 to enable piston movement. , a push-down surface 1011 that is pushed down by a player's operation, and an operation detection section (not shown) that is detected by an operation detection sensor.

The internal structure section 1030 mainly biases and holds the push-down section 1010 in an unoperated position, includes a spring member (not shown) that expands and contracts when the player presses down, and detects the operation when the player presses down. An operation detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the part has moved to a predetermined position, and a light emitting part 1034 having a plurality of light sources k to illuminate the push-down surface 1011.

Effect input based on the operation explanatory cross-sectional view of the effect input button whose pressed down part is a flat shape, Part 1 in FIG. 57, and the operation explanatory cross-sectional view of the effect input button whose pressed-down surface is curved, shown in Figure 58. To explain the operation of the button 1000, when the player presses down the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061, the pressing parts 1030 and 1060 move along the wall surfaces of the inner diameter parts 1022 and 1072 of the outer walls 1020 and 1070. and move. At this time, the distances between the light emitting parts 1034, 1084 of the internal structures 1030, 1080 and the back surfaces of the push-down surfaces 1011, 1061 become closer. Further, when the player stops operating the push-down surfaces 1011 and 1061, the push-down parts 1030 and 1060 are biased and held at the initial position using the repulsive force of the spring member.

In recent years, the sizes of the production button P381 and the sub-switch 20 have gradually increased, and a production input button 1000 having large-area push-down surfaces 1011, 1061 and a plurality of light sources k has been adopted. However, when the size of the effect input button 1000 increases, problems that do not occur with the effect input button 1000 of normal size may occur.

First, the first possible malfunction will be explained based on the illustration of effect input button malfunction explanatory diagram No. 1 shown in FIG. 59. A light emitting section 1034 is provided at the bottom of the back surface of the push-down surface 1011 of the normal effect input button 1000, which illuminates the entire push-down section 1010 centered on the push-down surface 1011. In addition, when the stroke of the push-down section 1010 is long, the push-down surface needs to be sufficiently illuminated by the light from the light emitting section even when the push-down operation is not performed. It is necessary to narrow the distance between the surface 1010 and the light emitting section 1034 as much as possible. However, as the size of the production input button 1000 increases, the area of the pressing surface 1011 increases, and when operated with strong force, the curvature of the center of the pressing surface 1011 increases and the center of the light emitting part 1034 There is a risk that the mounted light source k (for example, an LED) may be damaged by contact.

Next, the second possible malfunction will be explained based on the effect input button malfunction explanatory diagram No. 2 of FIG. 60. In normal operation, the push-down part 1060 of the production input button 1000 performs reciprocating motion by the player's operation, but in particular, in the case of the production input button 1000 equipped with a vibration generator, the inner diameter of the outer wall part 1070 Since the clearance between the push-down portion 1072 and the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1060 is large, eccentric movement as shown in FIG. 60 may occur. At this time, there is a risk that the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 may be damaged or the light source k placed around the light emitting portion 1084 may collide with the back side of the push-down surface 1061 and be destroyed. Note that eccentric movement means that normally the player presses down on the center of the push-down surface 1061, but due to repeated hits or when the push-down portion shifts from the center, the push-down portion 1060 becomes vertical. Refers to moving diagonally instead of in the same direction.

In the event that the component parts of the push-down part 1060 collide with the light source k and are destroyed due to the eccentric movement described above, once damage occurs in the inner diameter part 1072 of the outer wall part 1070 due to operational deterioration, eccentric movement continues to occur. Moreover, if the problem with the push-down mechanism worsens, there is a possibility that a large number of light sources k in a wide range may be destroyed by contact.

Therefore, as countermeasures for the malfunction of the effect input button 1000, the first is to guard against the event that a component comes into contact with the light source k, and the second is to destroy some of the multiple light sources that have been installed, so that the light emitting state A possible measure is to generate an abnormality in order to quickly recognize the malfunction of the production input button mechanism. In addition, in FIG. 60, the case where the push-down part 1060 moves to the left side when viewed from the front is illustrated, but the push-down part 1060 is not limited to this, and eccentricity in any direction such as the right side, the back side, the front side, etc. The configuration shown in the figure can also be adopted for movement.

Using the countermeasure explanatory diagram No. 1 in FIG. 61, the first countermeasure for light source destruction is that the central part of the push-down surface 1011 of the push-down portion 1010 of the production input button 1000 is bent by the player's operation. An example of countermeasures against destroying the light source k will be explained. Note that this embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main parts can be changed as appropriate.

The effect input button 1000 is composed of an outer wall part 1020, a push-down part 1010, and an internal structure part 1030, and a light source approaches the back surface of the most push-down surface of a light source part 1034 that constitutes a part of the internal structure part 1030. A screw n whose head height is higher than the height of the light source is adopted near k. By doing so, the push-down surface 1011 deformed into a screw head collides with the deformed push-down surface 1011 without colliding with the light source k. By doing so, the light source k can be prevented from being destroyed while the light emitting section 1034 is fixed. Furthermore, if the protective plating of the screw n disposed near the light source k is a silver-colored screw n such as chrome plating, the light emitted from the light source k is diffusely reflected by the screw head, making it possible to express a more vivid light emission mode.

Next, FIG. 62 shows an example of the arrangement of the light source k mounted on the substrate 1111 of the light emitting parts 1100A and 1100B, as well as positioning and fixing means such as bosses b and screws n, and FIG. 63 shows the destruction of the light source due to eccentric movement of the push-down part 1060. Countermeasures against light source destruction will be explained based on diagram 2 explaining measures to avoid. Note that this embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main parts can be changed as appropriate. Further, the substrate of the light emitting part is described using a film type having an extremely thin thickness in the embodiment, and the thickness direction is not shown in the drawings. Of course, a conventional glass epoxy resin may be used for the substrate of the light emitting section of this embodiment.

The board outer shape of the light emitting parts 1100A and 1100B has the same shape as the push-down surface 1061, and the light sources k are mainly provided at the center and peripheral parts of the board. Further, as a method of fixing the light emitting parts 1100A and 1100B, fixing using positioning bosses b and screws n is used. At this time, a screw n and a boss b are provided near the light source k. In particular, in the case of the light source k disposed on the periphery, the positioning and fixing means is disposed on the outer circumferential side of the light source k. This prevents the light source k from being destroyed by the constituent parts of the push-down portion 1060 due to eccentric movement caused by the player pushing down the peripheral edge of the push-down surface 1061.

Further, a modification example of the structure of the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion 1300 in FIG. 64 and a modification example of the structure of the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1200 that contacts the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion will be described. In this embodiment, a convex rail r with a semicircular cross section is provided on the outer diameter part 1262 of the push-down part 1200, and a concave rail h with a semicircular cross section is provided on the inner diameter part 1372 of the outer wall part 1300. The explanation will be given using an example in which the two are combined, but the structure is not limited to this, and any structure that exhibits the same effect may be used.

As an example of a modification of the effect input button 1000, semicircular concave rails h are provided at the 0 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, and 9 o'clock directions of the inner diameter part 1372 of the outer wall part 1300 when viewed from above. , a vertically continuous cross section of the inner diameter portion 1372 forms a concave half-moon shape. In addition, semicircular convex rails r are provided at the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction when the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 is viewed from above. A vertically continuous section of 1262 forms a semicircular convex rib shape. By these structures interlocking with each other, eccentric movement is less likely to occur, and even if eccentric movement occurs, the eccentricity in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction will be reduced even if eccentric movement occurs. Movements occur more frequently.

With this configuration, if the boss b and the screw n that fix the board 1111 of the light source k are arranged in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction, the light source k will be prevented from eccentrically moving. It becomes possible to efficiently prevent destruction with a smaller configuration. Although this embodiment has been described using an example in which four concave rails h and four convex rails r are used, the settings can be changed as appropriate depending on the size and shape of the effect input button 1000. In addition, a boss b for fixing the light emitting part, a positioning fixing means such as a screw n, etc. are arranged at a position that overlaps with the location where the concave rail h and the convex rail r are provided, and the positioning fixing means such as the boss b and the screw n are arranged, or on the inner circumference side. If the light source k is mounted in the direction toward the center of the substrate of the light emitting section 1100, it is possible to effectively prevent the light source from being destroyed due to eccentric movement of the push-down section 1060. Therefore, by linking and setting the arrangement positions of the concave rail h and the convex rail r, and the board fixing means of the light emitting part 1100 and the light source mounting position, it is possible to provide a cost-friendly effect input button 1000.

In the previous explanations, bosses b and screws n were used as examples of means for positioning and fixing the board of the light emitting unit 1100, but the shape of the board 1110 of the light emitting unit 1100, the size of the board 1110, the mounting angle of the board 1110, and the occurrence of defects Depending on the frequency, the boss b may be used as a fixing means for the substrate 1110, and the portion that protects the light source k may be selected as the boss b at the time of design.

In the previous explanation, we have explained how to prevent the destruction of the light source k due to a malfunction of the production input button 1000, but it is also possible that it may not be possible to prevent the destruction of the light source k depending on the unique structure of the production input button 1000 or the degree of the malfunction. It will be done. Therefore, an embodiment in which the light irradiation ranges of adjacent light sources k overlap each other will be described based on the explanatory diagram of the LED irradiation range in FIG. 65.

In FIG. 65(A), the regions w1 and w2 illuminated by the respective light sources k on the pressed surface are shown by solid lines and dashed-dotted lines, respectively. As shown in the figure, the light irradiation ranges of two adjacent light sources k partially overlap and push down the light onto the surface. For example, even if one light source is destroyed, the other light source k will push down the light and irradiate the surface. It becomes possible to irradiate the surface with light, making it possible to make uneven light emission less noticeable. Further, in FIG. 65(B), the regions w3, w4, and w5 where the pressed surface is illuminated by the plurality of light sources k arranged in succession are shown by solid lines, one-dot chain lines, and two-dot chain lines. In this way, by overlapping the areas that illuminate the push-down surface 1011, it is possible to further make uneven light emission due to destruction of the light source k less noticeable. In FIG. 65(B), an example is explained in which three consecutive light sources k are used to illuminate the push-down surface 1011 in three overlapping areas, but a plurality of light sources k are further arranged in a wide area and scattered. By doing so, it is possible to achieve further effects by illuminating a wide area with other overlaps.

Next, as a second measure against malfunction of the effect input button 1000, we will discuss a method to cause an abnormality in the light emitting state by destroying a part of the multiple light sources k, so that the malfunction of the effect input button mechanism can be recognized at an early stage. explain. Similar to the effect input button shown in FIG. 58, the effect input button of this embodiment has a combination of configurations of an outer wall portion, a push-down portion, and an internal component. However, the attachment position of the fixing means for attaching the substrate of the light emitting part of the internal component is different and has a structure that is lowered by one step in the vertical direction, and the substrate also has a similar structure. Note that description of parts similar to the above-mentioned configuration will be omitted.

Generally, the production input button 1000 is made of a common resin for design reasons, and a material suitable for wear resistance and sliding properties such as polyacetal resin is not used. Therefore, if an extremely large stress or continuous stress is continuously applied in a pressing direction different from the set operating direction of the pressing part 1060, a problem may occur in the structure of the production input button 1000, causing abnormal movement such as eccentric movement. If the behavior repeats and the problem progresses further, the sliding part of the production input button 1000 may become stuck, resulting in the pressing part 1060 not moving even when the pressing surface 1061 is operated, and the operation detection unit This may lead to serious problems, such as not correctly passing through the detection part of the operation detection sensor.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a mechanical malfunction of the effect input button 1000 can be detected early by destroying the light source k. More specifically, the light emitting part 1094 can be replaced without knowing the cause of the malfunction. A game machine P that gives an unpleasant impression to a player due to an event in which the light source is repeatedly destroyed in a short period of time or a mechanical malfunction of the performance input button 1000 can be discovered at an early stage.

The process of defect detection will be explained using the illustration of light source destruction due to eccentric movement of the effect input button 1000 in FIG. 66. The outer shape of the substrate of the light emitting portion 1094 is similar to that of the pressing surface, and the light sources are mainly provided at the center and peripheral portions of the substrate. Further, as a method of fixing the light emitting portion 1094, fixing using a positioning boss b and screw n is used, and the boss b and screw n are provided at a position one step lower than the surface where the light source k is provided. By doing this, the light source k is destroyed in the component part of the push-down part 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pushing down the peripheral edge of the push-down surface.

With such a configuration, mechanical malfunctions of the effect input button 1000 can be detected at an early stage. Further, if one light source k is destroyed, a plurality of surrounding light sources may stop emitting light. In addition, by making the light emitting pattern and lighting pattern of light source k the same, we can create an effect that makes it easier to discover early that light source k has been destroyed, such as when light source k that is supposed to be lit is not. You may go.

Furthermore, the appearance frequency and execution frequency of the light emission patterns that make the lighting patterns the same may be set to be the highest. By doing so, the game hall manager can discover a mechanical malfunction of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage without touching the effect input button 1000. In addition, by adopting the above-mentioned convex rail r and concave rail h, it is possible to limit the areas where damage is expected, and in addition, replace the light source k in the area where damage is expected with a socket-type light source with a relatively cheap unit price. By using the possible structure, not only can defects in the production input button 1000 be detected early, but also the light emitting part 1094 can be easily recycled, and the light source k can be replaced without having to submit a change approval notification to the local police station. be able to.

(Part 1) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and biasing and maintaining the push-down portion in a predetermined position;
a light-emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting unit are configured such that the distance between them is reduced by the push-down operation,
the substrate is locked by a fixing means,
The light source is characterized in that the push-down surface is configured not to be in contact with the light source when a push-down operation is performed on the push-down surface and the light source comes into contact with the fixing means.
For more details,
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and biasing and maintaining the push-down portion in a predetermined position;
a light-emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting unit are configured such that the distance between them is reduced by the push-down operation,
When a large stress is applied to the push-down surface operated by the player, and the center portion of the push-down surface is deformed, the push-down surface is the first of the parts that make up the light emitting section. The device is characterized in that what comes into contact with the back side is a fixing means for the substrate that is larger in height than the light source.
As an effect, since the pushing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed.

(Part 2) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion;
a light emitting unit provided inside the outer wall portion and having a spring member that biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; and a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the push-down portion; and the detection unit. A button unit comprising at least a detection section for detecting a target part,
The push-down surface and the light emitting section are configured such that the distance between them becomes narrower due to the push-down operation,
The substrate has a positioning part,
The configuration is such that when a pressing down action is performed on the pressing down surface and the positioning section is contacted, the pressing down surface and the light source do not come into contact with each other. a push-down surface that is slidably movable by the player and can be directly contacted by the player, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion;
a light emitting unit provided inside the outer wall portion and having a spring member that biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; and a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the push-down portion; and the detection unit. A button unit comprising at least a detection section for detecting a target part,
The push-down surface and the light emitting section are configured such that the distance between them becomes narrower due to the push-down operation, and when excessive stress is applied to the push-down surface operated by the player, the push-down surface is When the central portion of the surface is deformed, the positioning means of the substrate, which is larger in height than the light source, is the first of the parts constituting the light emitting section to come into contact with the back side of the surface. Features.
As an effect, since the pushing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed.

(Part 3) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral edge of the substrate of the light emitting section, and a fixing means for the substrate, which is larger in height than the light sources, is provided at a portion further outside an imaginary line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources. ,
the substrate is locked by a fixing means,
The light source is characterized in that the light source is configured such that when a pressing down operation is performed on the pressing down surface and the fixing means is contacted, the rear surface of the pressing down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
The effect is that in order to prevent contact between the push-down part and the light source of the light emitting part if the push-down part moves eccentrically, the light source can be fixed by placing the board fixing means on the outer circumferential side of the light source. It is possible to prevent damage to the

(Part 4) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
The substrate has a positioning part,
The push-down surface is configured not to be in contact with the light source when a push-down operation is performed on the push-down surface and the positioning section is contacted.
For more details,
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
The board has a positioning part, and a plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral edge of the board of the light emitting part, and a part further outside of a virtual line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources has a height higher than the light source. The method is characterized in that means for positioning the substrate in a large direction is provided.
The effect is to prevent the push-down part and the light source of the light emitting part from coming into contact if the push-down part moves eccentrically, by placing the fixing means on the outer circumferential side of the light source. It is possible to prevent damage.

(Part 5) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
the substrate is locked by a fixing means,
The push-down surface is configured such that when a push-down operation is performed on the push-down surface and the light source comes into contact with the push-down surface, the back surface of the push-down surface and the fixing means are not in contact with each other.
For more details,
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting section, and the distance between the back surface of the push-down surface and the fixing means arrangement position of the substrate is greater than the distance between the arrangement position of the plurality of light sources and the back surface of the push-down surface. It is characterized by being set at a remote location.
The effect is that if the push-down part moves eccentrically, the push-down part and the light source of the light emitting part will come into contact, and the light source will no longer emit light, making it easy to see if there is a mechanical problem with the production input button. can be converted into

(Part 6) Regarding the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button, the configuration to solve it is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion; and a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall portion and biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position. , a button unit comprising at least a light emitting section having a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the inside of the push-down section, and a detection section that detects the detection target section,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and a plurality of types of light emission patterns are implemented by the plurality of light sources,
In the light emission patterns executed in a predetermined game time, the plurality of light sources have the highest rate of execution in the same light emission pattern.
As an effect, if a problem occurs due to the destruction of a light source, it can be easily discovered if the light emitting pattern is the same as that of the adjacent light source. Therefore, if the same light emitting pattern as that of adjacent light sources is often performed, defects in the light sources can be discovered at an early stage.

(Part 7) The configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem with the effect input button is summarized as follows.
a push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that wraps and holds the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion;
a light emitting unit provided inside the outer wall portion and having a spring member that biases and maintains the push-down portion in a predetermined position; and a substrate mounted with a light source that irradiates light into the push-down portion; and the detection unit. A button unit comprising at least a detection section for detecting a target part,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting section, and the light sources are mounted such that the light irradiation ranges of the plurality of light sources always overlap with adjacent light sources.
The effect is that if a problem occurs due to the destruction of a light source, by overlapping the light irradiation range of the light source where the problem occurred and the adjacent light source, when all lights are turned on, a part of the light irradiation area will become dark. can be reduced.
<Sixth embodiment>

Next, a mechanism for transmitting vibrations emitted from a vibration device provided in a performance button in a pachinko game machine will be explained.

In the pachinko game machine, a configuration that can execute button effects will be described in detail below. Here, the button performance in a pachinko gaming machine refers to the display of an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the performance button at a predetermined timing during symbol variation, and the button validity period during which the operation promotion image is displayed. Predetermined operations on the production button (single press operation that turns on → off within 0.3 seconds, long press operation that turns on → off for more than 0.3 seconds, multiple on → off within 0.3 seconds) By performing a series of press operations (e.g., multiple presses), a series of post-operation effects (e.g., effects that indicate the expected jackpot of the symbol change using the content of the character's dialogue or the color of the characters) will be executed. It is called. Note that if the button validity period ends without performing a predetermined operation on the production button during the button validity period, the post-operation production may not be performed, or the button validity period may end at the end of the button validity period. It may also be configured to perform post-operation effects. Further, the button may be configured to be valid even during a period in which the operation promotion image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation promotion image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example is such that the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is displayed (or during the button validity period) to enable the player to operate the effect button. The presentation is designed to notify people of this. Note that the predetermined button effect will be referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. In addition, the magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), vibration speed, acceleration of vibration displacement, etc., but in this example, the We will only discuss whether the magnitude of the displacement of the vibration is transmitted. The magnitude of the displacement is, for example, the width between the uppermost state and the lowermost state when the performance A is executed and the performance button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to up and down, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, when performance A is executed, the performance button vibrates, and the displacement of the vibration of the performance button is 1 cm.

When playing a pachinko machine, the player plays the game while touching the handle, but if the vibration displacement of the production button is transmitted to the handle without being damped, the player may be unable to control the firing strength. As a result, the game balls may be ejected with an unintended ejection intensity, creating the possibility of unexpected losses.

In FIG. 67, the parts connecting the performance button and the handle operated by the player are connected by one part (front member).
Furthermore, when looking at the Pachinko machine from the front, in the straight line from the production button to the handle, there is a substantially right angle and a substantially curved line between the location where the production button on the front member is connected and the location where the handle is connected. No shape is included, and vibrations can be transmitted in a straight line.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the front member, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front member is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front member to the handle, which is a member different from the front member, and since the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.8 cm.
In this way, when the vibrations from the performance button go through only one component from the performance button to the handle, large vibrations will be transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of a gaming machine in which vibrations generated in the performance button are difficult to be transmitted to the handle will be described in detail below.

In Figure 68, the parts that connect the performance button and the handle operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (upper plate, upper member, and lower member), and the upper member and lower member are connected with screws. .
When the Pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include any substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape in a straight line from the performance button to the handle.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a different member from the upper plate, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is transmitted. Attenuated, the vibration displacement at the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the upper member and lower member in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so it is better than when two different members are joined. can also dampen vibrations. In addition, when there is no mention of a method of connecting two different members, such as the upper plate and the upper member in the figure, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and since the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.2 cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the handle, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle, compared to when there is only one part from the production button to the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is less likely to affect the player's firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the handle is less likely to be changed due to the execution of a button effect. .

In Figure 69, the parts that connect the production button and the handle operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (upper plate, upper member, and lower member), and the upper member and lower member are connected by fitting. There is. A self-contained type means that at least a portion of the joint is a self-contained type, as shown in the dotted circle in the same figure, so that the connection between two different members will not be released even if force is applied in one direction. It is.
When the Pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include any substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape in a straight line from the production button to the handle.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and as the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected by fitting, the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the lower member becomes 0.2 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a fitting type, such as the upper member and the lower member in the same figure, the fitting type joint is compared to a straight joint as shown in Fig. 69. Furthermore, since the vibrations are attenuated, the vibrations can be more attenuated than when two different members are joined (when the joints are on a straight line).

Thereafter, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and since the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.1 cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the handle, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle, compared to when there is only one part from the production button to the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is less likely to affect the player's firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the handle is less likely to be changed due to the execution of a button effect. .

In Figure 70, the parts that connect the performance button and the handle operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (upper plate, upper member, and lower member), and the upper member and lower member are connected with screws. .
When the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the front, in a straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include a substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape, and the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape. .

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and as the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is transmitted. Attenuated, the vibration displacement at the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the upper member and lower member in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so it is better than when two different members are joined. can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape, the vibration is transmitted to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member. When the vibration is transmitted, the vibration is damped more than when it cannot be transmitted in a straight line and can be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle is 0.15 cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the handle, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle, compared to when there is only one part from the production button to the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is less likely to affect the player's firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the handle is less likely to be changed due to the execution of a button effect. .

In Figure 71, the parts that connect the production button and the handle operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (upper plate, upper member, and lower member), and the upper member and lower member are connected with screws. .
When the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the front, in a straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper tray and the upper member do not have a substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape, and the lower member includes a substantially curved shape. .

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the upper plate, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and as the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the upper member and the lower member are connected with screws, the vibration is transmitted. Attenuated, the vibration displacement at the lower member becomes 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the upper member and lower member in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so it is better than when two different members are joined. can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts.Furthermore, since the lower member includes a substantially curved shape, it has a substantially curved shape. The vibrations are more damped than without, and the vibration displacement at the handle is 0.12 cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the handle, it is possible to reduce the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle, compared to when there is only one part from the production button to the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is less likely to affect the player's firing operation, and it is possible to create a game machine in which the strength of the handle is less likely to change due to the execution of a button effect. .

Although other components for damping vibrations (damping displacement of vibrations) are not shown, parts made of different materials (such as metal) are provided between the performance button and the handle operated by the player. If there is, the vibration will be further damped. For example, if the effect button vibrates and the effect button is connected to the handle using plastic, plastic, or plastic parts, it is better to connect the effect button to the handle using plastic, metal, or plastic parts. The vibrations transmitted to the are weak. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, vibrations transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or more parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various boards can be reduced.

When the performance causes the performance button to vibrate, vibrations are transmitted to the handle, and if the strength of the handle fluctuates, the ball to be hit will be shaken, resulting in a disadvantage to the player.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorption device to the device that vibrates the presentation button, the cost may be high and the structure may also become large.
In the present invention, the structure of the performance button does not become bulky, vibrations are not easily transmitted to the handle, and the invention maximizes performance without causing any disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 72 is a table summarizing the values of vibration displacement when one or more of the above-described configurations capable of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement are employed. The value of the vibration displacement is shown in the figure, and the following configurations can be considered as a method of damping the transmission of vibration displacement, and these should be considered based on the shape, design, cost, etc. of the desired gaming machine. , may be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration that dampens vibration displacement>
(1) Shape of joint: Screws, inset (2) Increase in the number of parts from the production button to the handle (3) Shape of parts: some approximately right angles, some approximately curved (4) Materials such as metal <Seventh embodiment> using members of

Next, a mechanism for transmitting vibrations emitted from a vibration device provided in a performance button in a slot machine will be explained.

In the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the pachinko game machine that can execute performance A accompanied by vibration of the performance button as a button performance has been described in detail, but the configuration is also applicable to a reel-type game machine. Here, the button effect in a reel-type gaming machine refers to the display of an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing while the reels are rotating or when the reels are stopped. Predetermined operations on the production button during the button validity period (single press operation that turns on → off within 0.3 seconds, long press operation that turns on → off for more than 0.3 seconds, within 0.3 seconds) By performing a repeated tap operation that turns on → off multiple times, etc.), you can display the post-operation effect (the content of the character's dialogue and the color of the characters, indicating that you have won a bonus, that AT will be executed, and that ART A series of performances in which a button performance (such as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the button will be executed, etc.) is called a button performance. In addition, if the button validity period ends without performing the specified operation on the production button during the button validity period (for example, if the stop button operation, bet button operation, or start lever operation is accepted) In this case, the post-operation effect may not be executed, or the post-operation effect may be executed at the end timing of the valid period of the button. Further, the button may be configured to be valid even during a period in which the operation promotion image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation promotion image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example is such that the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is displayed (or during the button validity period) to enable the player to operate the effect button. The presentation is designed to notify people of this. Note that the predetermined button effect will be referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. In addition, the magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), vibration speed, acceleration of vibration displacement, etc., but in this example, the We will only discuss whether the magnitude of the displacement of the vibration is transmitted. The magnitude of the displacement is, for example, the width between the uppermost state and the lowermost state when the performance A is executed and the performance button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to up and down, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, when performance A is executed, the performance button vibrates, and the displacement of the vibration of the performance button is 1 cm.

When playing a game on a reel-type gaming machine, the player operates a stop button to stop the reels. In addition, since the reel stop position may differ depending on the timing when the stop button operation is accepted, if the vibration displacement of the production button is transmitted to the stop button without being damped, it will affect the player's stop operation. Then, the operation of the stop button is accepted at an unintended timing, creating the possibility of unexpected losses. In addition, although the stop button in the structure illustrated below may be any stop button, the structure of the left stop button will be illustrated as an example.

In FIG. 73, the parts connecting the production button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by one part (front mask).
Furthermore, when looking at the reel-type gaming machine from the front, in a straight line from the production button to the stop button, there is a nearly right angle between the place where the production button on the front mask is connected and the place where the stop button is connected. It does not include any substantially curved shape, and vibrations can be transmitted in a straight line.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the front mask, which is a different member from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the front mask is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button, which is a different member from the front mask, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0.8 cm. Become.
In this way, if the vibrations caused by the effect button pass through only one part from the effect button to the stop button, large vibrations will be transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of a gaming machine in which vibrations generated in the performance button are difficult to be transmitted to the stop button will be described in detail below.

In Figure 74, the parts that connect the production button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the reel-type gaming machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include any substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the control panel, which is a different part from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, vibrations are transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a different member from the control panel, and vibrations are transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, since the control panel and the front mask are connected with screws, , the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the front mask middle and stop button unit in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case of Note that if there is no mention of a method for connecting two different members, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is It becomes 0.6cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a different member from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It becomes 5cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when there is only one part from the production button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, it is unlikely to affect the player's stop operation, and the gaming machine is unlikely to have a situation where the timing of accepting the stop button's stop operation is shifted due to the execution of the button effect. can be created.

In Figure 75, the parts that connect the production button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are fitted together. connected. A self-contained type means that at least a portion of the joint is a self-contained type, as shown in the dotted circle in the same figure, so that the connection between two different members will not be released even if force is applied in one direction. It is.
When the reel-type gaming machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include any substantially right-angled or substantially curved shape in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the control panel, which is a different part from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibrations are transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a different member from the control panel, and the vibrations are transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, because the control panel and the front mask are connected by fitting, , the vibration is damped and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask is 0.65 cm. Here, when two different parts are connected by a snap-in type, as in the case of the control panel and the front mask in the same figure, the vibration is further damped by the snap-in joint compared to a straight joint. Therefore, vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined (when the joint is on a straight line).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is It becomes 0.55cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a different member from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 45cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when there is only one part from the production button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, it is unlikely to affect the player's stop operation, and the gaming machine is unlikely to have a situation where the timing of accepting the stop button's stop operation is shifted due to the execution of the button effect. can be created.

In Figure 76, the parts that connect the performance button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected by screws. It is connected.
When looking at the reel-type gaming machine from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button, the control panel and front mask do not include any approximately right-angled or approximately curved shapes, and the stop button unit is approximately right-angled. Contains shape.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the control panel, which is a different part from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, vibrations are transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a different member from the control panel, and vibrations are transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, since the control panel and the front mask are connected with screws, , the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the front mask middle and stop button unit in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case of Note that if there is no mention of a method for connecting two different members, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, since the front mask includes a substantially right-angled shape, , when the vibration is transmitted through the front mask, it cannot be transmitted in a straight line, and the vibration is more attenuated than when it can be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is becomes 0.5cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a different member from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 4cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when there is only one part from the production button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, it is unlikely to affect the player's stop operation, and the gaming machine is unlikely to have a situation where the timing of accepting the stop button's stop operation is shifted due to the execution of the button effect. can be created.

In Figure 77, the parts that connect the production button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by multiple parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected by screws. It is connected.
When looking at the reel-type gaming machine from the front, in the straight line from the production button to the stop button, the control panel and front mask do not include any approximately right-angled or approximately curved shapes, and the stop button unit is approximately curved. Contains shape.

When performance A is selected and executed, the performance button first vibrates. The displacement of the production button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the control panel, which is a different part from the production button, and as the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, vibrations are transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a different member from the control panel, and vibrations are transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, since the control panel and the front mask are connected with screws, , the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws, such as the front mask middle and stop button unit in the same figure, the vibrations are also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case of Note that if there is no mention of a method for connecting two different members, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts.Furthermore, since the front mask includes a substantially curved shape, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts. , the vibration is more damped than if it could be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button unit is 0.48 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a different member from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 38cm.

In this way, when there are multiple parts from the production button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button can be made smaller than when there is only one part from the production button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, it is unlikely to affect the player's stop operation, and the gaming machine is unlikely to have a situation where the timing of accepting the stop button's stop operation is shifted due to the execution of the button effect. can be created.

Although other components for damping vibrations (damping displacement of vibrations) are not shown, parts made of different materials (such as metal) are provided between the performance button and the stop button operated by the player. If it is, the vibrations will be further damped. For example, it is better to connect the effect button to the stop button with plastic, metal, or plastic parts than to vibrate the effect button and connect the stop button with plastic, plastic, or plastic parts. , the vibration transmitted to the stop button is weak. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, vibrations transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or more parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various boards can be reduced.

When the performance causes the performance button to vibrate, vibrations are transmitted to the stop button, and if the timing at which the stop button is pressed is inconsistent, the position at which the spinning drum stops will be shifted, causing a disadvantage to the player. Put it away.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorption device to the device that vibrates the presentation button, the cost may be high and the structure may also become large.
In the present invention, the structure of the performance button does not become bulky, vibrations are not easily transmitted to the stop button, and the invention maximizes performance without causing any disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 78 is a table summarizing the values of vibration displacement when one or more of the above-described configurations capable of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement are employed. The value of the vibration displacement is shown in the figure, and the following configurations can be considered as a method of damping the transmission of vibration displacement, and these should be considered based on the shape, design, cost, etc. of the desired gaming machine. , may be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration that dampens vibration displacement>
(1) Shape of joint parts: Screw fastening, inset (2) Increase the number of parts from the production button to the stop button (3) Shape of parts: some approximately right angles, some approximately curved (4) Metal, etc. Use material parts

<Additional notes on the sixth and seventh embodiments>
In order to absorb vibrations when assembling each member, there is a technique for suppressing transmitted vibrations by using a cushioning material such as a rubber washer (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-29853). The more cushioning material is provided, the less the impact on the durability of each member. However, the cost of developing a gaming machine tends to increase due to the provision of new components that are not originally necessary for the gaming machine.

The present invention reduces the cost of developing a gaming machine by suppressing the transmission of vibrations based on the members that make up the gaming machine without providing new members such as cushioning materials, and efficiently transmits vibrations. It becomes possible to suppress the

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, regarding the fact that low active determination is used to determine the logic level when an input device used in a gaming machine that affects the result of a game is operated, we will explain below using the start switch of a slot machine as an example of an input device. explain.

Typical functions executed by operating a start switch in a slot machine will be explained. First, the winning combination is determined (an internal lottery is performed). The type of symbol combination that can be displayed is determined according to the winning combination, and the start switch influences the outcome of the game, such as by giving the player the right to win game medals, replays, and bonus games. Second, while the setting change device is in operation (in the setting change mode), the set value can be determined by operating the start switch. More specifically, in the setting change mode, a setting value candidate is selected by operating a setting switch, and the selected setting value is confirmed by operating a start switch. The set value is designed so that the player plays the game multiple times, and the expected medal acquisition value of the number of game medals to be paid out is approximately determined from the number of game medals inserted in the game. For example, a gaming machine is generally designed such that the expected medal acquisition value is negative (that is, decreased) at setting value 1, and positive (that is, increased) at setting value 6.

As described above, the start switch is an input device that affects the result of the game, and is an input device of high importance for the gaming machine.

Here, the high active determination, low active determination, and chattering described in this embodiment will be explained.

High active determination is also referred to as positive logic, and a state where the voltage level is high is associated with 1, and a state where the voltage level is low is associated with 0. Low active determination is also referred to as negative logic, where a state where the voltage level is low is associated with 1. , refers to a method that associates states with high voltage levels with 0. It is easier to understand intuitively using the high active determination.

Chattering, also referred to as noise, is a phenomenon in which when a mechanical switch is operated, the contact and non-contact state repeats on and off at high speed in a short period of time at the moment the separated contacts are brought into contact. In this embodiment, in the start switch mechanism, when a mechanical switch is operated, a detection piece inside the mechanism momentarily repeats contact and non-contact at high speed when the sensor light passes through. I can do it.

Here, a mechanism for detecting whether or not the start switch has been input will be briefly described. When the start switch is operated and a winning combination is determined, a change in the state of light reception or light blocking of the sensor occurs (Figure 79(a)(b)), and the change in the state of the sensor occurs constantly. In order to determine that the start switch has been operated, it is determined that the start switch has been operated when the voltage level crosses a determination threshold (in this embodiment, it is over 60 for high active determination and below 40 for low active determination), Data indicating that the start switch has been operated is stored in a specific area of the RAM (FIG. 79(c)). A typical sensor detection structure detects that a start switch is turned on by a detection piece blocking sensor light from the sensor light input section.

Here, when the detection piece starts to change the light receiving state of the sensor light receiving section, chattering may occur. A possible problem when chattering occurs is that a uniform lottery result may not be obtained when the winning combination is determined by operating the start switch. When selling gaming machines, it is stipulated that systems that cause uneven appearance of winning combinations cannot be sold, and players cannot play games with peace of mind. Furthermore, due to the occurrence of chattering, there is a possibility that the appearance frequency of winning combinations may become unstable.

In this example, in order to reduce the frequency of false detections due to chattering, low active determination is employed as the logic level determination used for detecting the start switch.

FIGS. 80 and 81 show comparison diagrams between the case where high active determination is adopted and the case where low active determination is adopted.

When the high active determination shown in FIG. 80 is adopted, the voltage level increases as the sensor light receiving section enters the light shielding state. When the sensor light receiving section enters the light shielding state and the voltage level exceeds 60, which is set as a threshold value, it is determined that the start switch has been input. Although the threshold value is set to 60 here, the voltage level threshold value may be changed as appropriate depending on the design. Due to the mechanical design, chattering may occur when the voltage level changes, and in particular, when changing from a light-receiving state to a light-blocking state, the amplitude of chattering tends to increase, and the number of times the determination threshold is exceeded increases. It is in. If the threshold value unintentionally crosses multiple times due to the influence of chattering, the possibility that the timing of determining the winning hand will become uncertain increases. Specifically, the winning combination will be determined by the hand determining means based on the fact that the judgment threshold of 60 for high active judgment has been exceeded, but if the condition of exceeding the judgment threshold is met multiple times due to the occurrence of chattering. In some cases, the winning combination is determined multiple times and a result that is clearly different from the winning combination when the player operates the start switch and the detection piece passes the sensor may be generated, and a uniform lottery result is provided. There is a possibility that it cannot be done.

On the other hand, when the low active determination shown in FIG. 81 is adopted, the voltage level is lowered as the sensor light receiving section enters the light receiving state. When the sensor light-receiving section enters the light-receiving state and the voltage level becomes less than 40, which is set as a threshold value, it is determined that the start switch has been input. Although the threshold value is set to 40 here, the voltage level threshold value may be changed as appropriate depending on the design. Due to the mechanical design, chattering may occur when the voltage level changes, but when changing from a light-blocking state to a light-receiving state, the amplitude of chattering tends to be smaller than when making a high-active judgment, and the judgment threshold There is a tendency for the number of times that the value falls below this to decrease.

From the above, it is possible to derive stable results by using low active judgment for input devices that affect the outcome of the game, such as determining the winning combination (for example, the start switch mentioned above). In this case, low active judgment is adopted.

In the above description, the start switch of a slot machine is taken as an example, but the low active determination is not limited to this, and the low active determination may be applied to an input device related to an error, a setting key switch, and the like. Further, in a pachinko game machine, it is desirable to use the input device such as an RWM clear switch that affects the result of the game. That is, in both slot machines and pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to employ low active determination for input devices that influence the outcome of games.

<Additional notes in the eighth embodiment>
As an example of filtering processing when chattering occurs, there is a technology that discards data or copies previous data if it is not a normal storage pattern (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-62317). The prior art includes a description of positive logic (high active determination), but does not include any description of the merits of adopting low active. In this embodiment, an input device that employs negative logic (low active judgment) is adopted as an input device that affects the progress of the game, thereby reducing the influence of chattering and reducing the influence on games such as lottery. It can reduce the blurring of the results.

<<Structure of the back of the lower ball plate>>
The pachinko game machine according to this example has the lower ball plate P342 as described above, and the structure applicable to this example as the structure on the back side of the lower ball plate P342 will be described in detail below. Note that the back side of the lower ball plate P342 is the lower side when viewed from the player. Further, the back surface of the lower spherical plate P342 is referred to as the lower spherical plate back surface.

First, FIG. 82 is a bottom view of the gaming machine seen from below as viewed from the player. The back side of the lower ball dish P342 has a lower ball dish back surface UR, and the lower ball dish back surface UR has an open state in which the game balls stored in the lower ball dish P342 can be discharged downward, and a lower ball dish. A discharge shutter ST is provided which can take a closed state in which game balls stored in the game ball cannot be discharged downward.

In addition, when the back side of the lower spherical dish P342 is composed of one surface, the one surface is the lower spherical dish back surface UR, and when the back side of the lower spherical dish P342 is composed of multiple faces. In the case where the lower spherical plate P342 is bent or curved, the entire back side of the lower spherical plate P342 may be referred to as the lower spherical plate back surface UR, or the surface where the discharge shutter ST is provided may be referred to as the lower spherical plate back surface UR. It may also be called.

In addition, on the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate, there is a recessed screw BS1 whose head is in a recessed position (lower position) than the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate when it is fixed, and a recessed screw BS1 whose head is in a recessed position (lower position) than the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate when it is fixed. It has a protruding screw BS2 whose head is in a protruding position (higher position) than the back surface UR of the lower spherical dish, and a protrusion DP that projects from the back surface UR of the lower spherical dish. Note that the recessed screw BS1, the protruding screw BS2, and the protruding portion DP may be provided on the same surface, or may be provided on different surfaces. Further, it is not necessary to have all of these, and as long as it has one or more of them, it is applicable to the configuration of this example.

In addition, in the figure, a configuration in which screws are fixed such as the recessed screw BS1 and the protruding screw BS2 is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this. Alternatively, a removable rivet, such as a push rivet, may be used.

In addition, it should be noted that the configurations described above and the configurations described later in this example can be combined in any way, and it is also possible to combine a plurality of configurations.

Next, FIG. 83 is an enlarged view of the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate applicable to this example. Note that the positional relationship between the recessed screw BS1, the protrusion DP, and the discharge shutter ST in the same figure is just an example, and the configuration may be the same as the positional relationship illustrated in FIG. 82, or the position illustrated in FIG. It may be configured differently from the relationship.

In the figure, game balls are stored in a lower ball tray P342, and a box (sometimes referred to as a dollar box) in which game balls are stored is placed below the lower ball tray P342. As shown in the figure, the dollar box is fully stocked with game balls (the game balls are stored above the opening surface of the dollar box).

<About AA>
As shown in the lower left of the figure, the height AA of the protrusion DP (the height of the protrusion DP from the back surface UR of the lower ball tray) is less than half the height b, which is the diameter of the game ball. (AA≦b/2). With this configuration, when exchanging a full dollar box for an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, the game balls are less likely to get caught on the protrusion DP. Therefore, it is possible to configure the game ball so that it is difficult for the game ball to spill due to being caught on the protrusion DP. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned protrusion screw BS2, the height of the protrusion screw BS2 is less than half of b, which is the diameter of the game ball, similarly to the protrusion part DP.

The above-mentioned configuration is designed to prevent the game balls from spilling out due to depressions or protrusions in a situation where the dollar box is full of game balls. It is sufficient that the tall protruding screw BS2 does not exist. That is, even in a configuration in which the protruding screw BS2 is not provided on the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate, the same effect as the above-mentioned configuration can be created, and even in such a case, (AA≦b/2). It is said that it is established.

<About AB>
As shown in the lower right corner of the figure, the depth of the recessed screw BS1 (the depth from the back surface UR of the lower ball plate to the recessed screw BS1) is less than half the height of the diameter b of the game ball. (AB≦b/2). With this configuration, when exchanging a full dollar box for an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, the game ball will dent and the screw BS1 will be fixed in the dent. The game ball can be configured to be less likely to be caught in the recess, and the event that the game ball spills due to being caught in the recess to which the recess screw BS1 is fixed is less likely to occur. In the figure, AB is the length from the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate to the bottom of the head of the recessed screw BS1, but AB is the length from the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate to the top of the head of the recessed screw BS1 ( It may be the length up to the top of the head). Regarding the recessed screw BS1, similar to the protruding screw BS2, even when the recessed screw BS1 is not provided on the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate, it is possible to create the same effect as the above-mentioned configuration, and in such a case, It is also said that (AB≦b/2) holds true.

<About AC>
As shown in the upper part of the figure, the depth of the ejection shutter ST (the depth from the back surface UR of the lower ball tray to the ejection shutter ST) is greater than or equal to b, which is the diameter of the game ball ( AC≧b). With this configuration, when replacing a full dollar box with an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, the entire game ball will not be caught in the recess of the discharge shutter ST. This makes it difficult to push out other game balls, and it is possible to configure the ball to be configured so that an event in which other game balls are pushed out and spilled is less likely to occur. Furthermore, the discharge shutter ST can be configured to be easily opened and closed even when the dollar box is full.

Next, FIG. 84 is an enlarged view of the back surface UR of the lower spherical plate applicable to this example. The configuration in this figure is different from that in FIG. 83, and the depth AD of the ejection shutter ST (the depth from the back surface UR of the lower ball tray to the ejection shutter ST) is less than half of the diameter b of the game ball. (AD≦b/2). With this configuration, when replacing a full dollar box with an empty dollar box, even if the full dollar box is dragged, the game ball will not get caught in the recess of the discharge shutter ST. It is possible to configure the game ball to be difficult to spill, and to make it difficult for the game ball to spill due to being caught in the recess of the discharge shutter ST. Furthermore, the discharge shutter ST can be configured to be easily opened and closed even when the dollar box is full.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, by configuring the length (depth or height) of the recesses and protrusions on the back surface UR of the lower ball tray to be less than half of the game balls, the money is stored in the dollar box. The game balls stored in the dollar box are less likely to get caught, and the game balls stored in the dollar box are less likely to spill. In addition, by configuring the length (depth or height) of the depressions and protrusions on the back surface UR of the lower ball tray to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, even if the game ball stored in the dollar box gets caught, , the other game balls can be configured to be difficult to push out, and the entire game balls stored in the dollar box can be made difficult to spill.

Although the configuration of the lower ball tray back surface UR has been described in detail, the above configuration is also applicable to gaming machines that do not have a lower ball tray. As an example, in a game machine in which game balls are not ejected outside the game machine (sometimes referred to as an enclosed game machine), a member on the lower side of the game machine (near the position where the above-mentioned lower ball tray is installed) is used. The above configuration may also be applied to the shape of the back side (lower side) of the other member. With such a configuration, the space under the gaming machine can be increased, and the space can be used effectively, such as for placing player's belongings.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the configuration of the lower spherical plate back surface UR described above with any of the configurations of this example.

<<Structure of the back of the gaming machine>>
The configuration of the buttons provided on the back of the gaming machine applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 85, it has a RAM clear button RB that can be pressed to execute RAM clear when the power is turned on, and an error release button EB that is used to clear the error when a predetermined error occurs. Note that the error release button EB is just an example, and any button other than the RAM clear button RB provided on the back of the gaming machine may be used (the same applies below). Furthermore, the back side of the gaming machine may be replaced with the back side of the front door to constitute a reel-type gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 86 is an enlarged view of the RAM clear button RB and error release button EB, which are applicable to this example. The initial positions of both the RAM clear button RB and the error release button EB are illustrated.

<RAM clear button>
First, the RAM clear button RB will be explained in detail. The RAM clear button RB is configured to slide within the RAM clear button frame RBW by pressing the RAM clear button operation surface RBS, and to detect button operation (on). Furthermore, the pressed RAM clear button RB is configured to return to its initial position by the biasing force.

BA is the height (of the protruding portion) of the RAM clear button RB at its initial position. Further, BB is the length of the long side of the RAM clear button operation surface RBS. Further, BC is the distance between the RAM clear button RB and the side surface of the RAM clear button frame portion RBW (this distance may be referred to as play).

<Error release button>
Next, the error release button EB will be explained in detail. The error release button EB is configured to slide within the error release button frame portion EBW by pressing the error release button operation surface EBS, and to be able to detect button operation (on). Further, the pressed error release button EB is configured to return to the initial position by the biasing force.

BD is the height (of the protruding portion) of the error release button EB at its initial position. Moreover, BE is the length of the long side of the error release button operation surface EBS. Further, BF is the distance between the error release button EB and the side surface of the error release button frame portion EBW (this distance may be referred to as play).

Here, in this example, the relationship between the RAM clear button and the error release button is configured as follows.
(1) The lengths of BA and BD are different. (2) The lengths of BB and BF are different. (3) The lengths of BC and BG are different. The manager of the game center wishes to clear the RAM, When operating the RAM clear button by reaching from the front side of the gaming machine to the back side of the gaming machine, the RAM clear button cannot be seen and the hand must be placed around the back side of the gaming machine to operate the RAM clear button. It is desirable that it be easy to determine whether or not it is the RAM clear button when touched. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, by making the operating members (for example, error release button) on the back side of the gaming machine and the RAM clear button different in shape as described above, the RAM clear button can be easily accessed without being confused with other buttons. Clear button can be operated.

Note that the BD may be configured to be shorter than the BA, or the BD may be configured to be longer than the BA. Further, the BF may be configured to be shorter than the BB, or the BF may be configured to be longer than the BB. Furthermore, the BG may be configured to be shorter than the BC, or the BG may be configured to be longer than the BC.

Next, the button stroke will be described in detail using FIG. 87. BH is the stroke of the RAM clear button. Here, the stroke is the distance from the initial position to the position where the press is detected (position from OFF to ON) when the button is pressed from the initial position and the gaming machine detects the button press. be. Further, BJ is the stroke of the error release button.

In the same figure, the distance from the initial position to the position where the press was detected (the position where it turned from OFF to ON) was compared as a stroke, but this is not limited to this. The distance traveled from the initial position when the button cannot be pressed may be compared.

Here, in this example, the relationship between the RAM clear button and the error release button is configured as follows.
(1) Different lengths of BH and BJ In this way, by making the strokes of the RAM clear button and other buttons on the back side of the gaming machine different (for example, the error release button), the administrator of the gaming hall can Even in a state where the RAM clear button cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to know that the RAM clear button has been operated, and the RAM can be cleared smoothly.

Note that BJ may be configured to be shorter than BH, or BJ may be configured to be longer than BH.

Further, the difference between the RAM clear button and other buttons on the back side of the gaming machine (for example, an error release button) may be configured as follows.
(1) RAM clear button operation surface RBS and error release button operation surface EBS have different shapes (2) RAM clear button operation surface RBS and error release button operation surface EBS have different surface areas (3) RAM clear button operation surface (4) The materials of the RAM clear button RB and the error release button EB are different. (5) The volumes of the RAM clear button RB and the error release button EB are different. different

In addition, although the case where the RAM clear button was compared with other buttons on the back side of the gaming machine was described above, the case is not limited to this, and when comparing the RAM clear button with other buttons on the front side of the gaming machine. It may be designed so that the above configuration is applied. As an example, the above configuration may be applied to a sub-input button and a RAM clear button that are controlled by a sub-control board provided on the front side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the shape of the RAM clear button is different from all other buttons provided on the gaming machine, so that the shape of the RAM clear button can be easily memorized.

Note that the configuration regarding the shape of the RAM clear button described above is also applicable to a reel-type gaming machine. For example, a reset switch (a switch that may be operated in the settings change mode) provided on the back side of the front door (on the inside of the housing when the front door is closed), and other buttons (such as a stop button, a sub For comparison with input buttons, max bet buttons, etc., a configuration having a different shape as described above may be applied. Note that the reset switch does not need to be provided on the back side of the front door.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the configuration regarding the shape of the RAM clear button described above with any of the configurations of this example.

<<Bottom structure>>
Next, the structure of the bottom of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below.

FIG. 88 is a side view of the right side of the Pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the player. In the figure, only the lower side of the Pachinko game machine is shown. The Pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a shape in which the bottom TB protrudes toward the back side (rearward as seen from the player). Note that the bottom portion TB is made of wood. Further, the payout control board P43 installed on the back side of the gaming machine is housed in a payout control board case HC made of transparent resin, and a heat radiation port HN is provided on the lower side of the payout control board case HC. The heat generated by the payout control board P43 is configured to be released to the outside from the heat radiation port HN, and by providing the heat radiation port HN in the payout control board case HC, heat does not accumulate inside the payout control board case HC. This can prevent the payout control board P43 from malfunctioning.

Further, as shown by the arrow in the figure, the bottom portion TB is not located vertically below the heat radiation port HN. As shown in the figure, the heat radiation port HN is provided on the lower surface of the dispensing control board case HC, and the heat generated by the dispensing control board P43 is radiated downward from the heat dissipation port HN. Become. Here, by configuring the bottom part TB so that it is not located vertically below the heat radiation port HN, the bottom part TB made of wood is made less likely to be damaged (hardly damaged) by the heat released from the heat radiation port HN. I can do it.

Next, FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the heat radiation port HN of the payout control board case HC. As shown in the figure, the heat radiation port HN is rectangular, and the length CA of the short side is shorter than the diameter b of the game ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the payout control board case HC from the heat dissipation port HN, and it is possible to prevent the payout control board P43 from being damaged due to a collision of the game ball. It can be prevented.

Although a plurality of heat dissipation ports HN are provided as shown in the figure, the length of the shortest short side of the plurality of heat dissipation ports HN provided on the lower side of the payout control board case HC is I am a CA. That is, the configuration is such that a game ball cannot pass through any of the plurality of heat radiation ports HN.

Next, FIG. 90 is an image diagram illustrating how a game ball bounces off the upper surface of the bottom TB. When a gaming machine is operated at a gaming parlor, since game balls are present on the back side of the gaming machine, there is a possibility that they may fall toward the back side of the gaming machine. For example, if the game balls ejected from the outlet or used as prize balls for players are moving on the back side of the game machine, and the device that moves the game balls is damaged, etc. Game balls may fall toward the back of the game machine.

In the figure, a case is illustrated in which a game ball falls from outside the gaming machine toward the bottom TB on the back side of the gaming machine and collides with the upper surface of the bottom TB, such as in the case described above. It should be noted that this example exemplifies the case where the collision occurs with the top surface of the bottom portion TB, rather than the case where the collision occurs with the side surface or the corner of the bottom portion TB.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example is provided with the payout control board case HC on the back of the gaming machine, and the payout control board case HC protrudes from the back side of the gaming machine (rearward as seen from the player). There is. In addition, as mentioned above, the bottom TB is not located vertically below the heat radiation port HN. In other words, the payout control board case HC is closer to the back of the gaming machine than the bottom TB (rearward as seen from the player). It stands out.

Further, as shown in the figure, the game ball falling toward the upper surface of the bottom portion TB is configured to collide with the upper surface of the bottom portion TB, bounce back, and then collide with the back surface portion HB. In other words, the game ball that has fallen toward the top surface of the bottom TB is configured so that it does not collide directly with the payout control board case HC after colliding with the top surface of the bottom TB and bouncing back. It is configured so that it either does not collide with the back surface part HB or collides with the payout control board case HC after colliding with the back surface part HB. That is, in the Pachinko game machine according to this example, the bottom part TB, the back part HB, and the payout control board case HC are designed so as to satisfy the above configuration.

In addition, if the game ball falls from above the trajectory of the game ball shown in the figure, the game ball will collide with the payout control board case HC and will not reach the bottom TB.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the payout control board case HC housing the payout control board P43 that affects the progress of the game from being damaged by the collision of the game balls.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the configuration of the bottom portion TB described above with any of the configurations of this example.

<Configuration related to speakers>
This is a configuration related to a speaker applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example. The upper part of the figure is a top view, and the lower part of the figure is a front view. The Pachinko game machine shown in the figure has two upper speakers P370 on the left and right sides and two lower speakers P141 on the left and right sides. Furthermore, as shown in the top view, the lower speaker P141 faces toward the front of the gaming machine (toward the player), and the sound output from the lower speaker P141 is also output toward the front of the gaming machine (toward the player). becomes. On the other hand, the upper speaker P370 faces outward from the front direction of the gaming machine (not toward the player), and the sound output from the upper speaker P370 also faces outward from the front direction of the gaming machine (from the player's direction). output in a different direction).

Further, the upper speaker P370 and the lower speaker P141 can output the same sound at the same time, and are also configured to output different sounds at the same time. For example, when a starting hole winning abnormality is detected as a predetermined error, the upper speaker P370 repeatedly outputs "bee beep" as a sound effect corresponding to the starting mouth winning abnormality, and the lower speaker P141 outputs "Winning abnormality. " is repeatedly output. With this configuration, the lower speaker P141 facing toward the player outputs audio so that the player can easily recognize the situation, and the upper speaker P141 facing toward the player outputs audio so that the player can easily recognize the situation. By configuring the speaker P370 to output a sound effect that is easy for an administrator with extensive experience in dealing with errors to hear (easily distinguishable from other sounds), the administrator can create a sound that is suitable for players and a Appropriate sounds can be output appropriately and at the same time.

It should be noted that there is no problem in combining the above-described speaker configuration with any of the configurations of this example.

The technical contents described in the detailed description above may be combined as appropriate.

P: Pachinko machine,
P1: outer frame,
P2: front frame,
P3: Glass frame,
P4: Back set unit,
P5: Game board,
P40: Main control board,
P41: Production control board,
P42: Image control board,
P43: Payout control board,
P44: Power supply board,
P47: Power switch,
P48: Ram clear switch,
P49: Setting key switch,
P50: Main control display device,
P51: 1st special symbol display device,
P52: Second special symbol display device,
P80: Production display device,
P81: Production operation means (P380: Production operation unit, P381: Production button, P382: Lever, P383: Cross key),
P82: Production lamp (P350: frame lamp, P550: panel lamp),
P83: Speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker)
P560: Performance role,
P710: 1st starting prize device,
P720: 2nd starting prize device,
P730: General prize winning device,
P740: General figure actuation gate device,
P750: Big prize opening device P755: Special electric accessory,
P770: Normal electric accessory 1: Slot machine 2: Front panel 3: Cabinet 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12 : Start switch 13a : Left stop switch 13b : Middle stop switch 13c : Right stop switch 17 : Medal slot 18 : MAX bet switch 19 : 1 bet switch 20 : Sub switch 21 : Sub cross key switch 22 : Eject switch 24a : Left Operation instruction lamp 24b: Middle operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 26: Number of credits display 27: Number of acquired coins display 28: Receiver 29: Cigarette ashtray 30: Seal storage section 32: Display device 34: Medal selector 35: Medal flow path 37: Setting key switch 38: Setting switch 39: Power supply device 40: Power switch 41: Main control board unit 42: Sub control board unit 43: Medal payout port 44: Hopper 45: Medal payout Part 46: Auxiliary tank 47: External output terminal board 48: Door open detection switch 52: Main ROM
53: Sub ROM
56: Main RAM
57: Sub RAM
60: Stop changeover switch 62: Automatic payment switch 64: 7 segment display 66: Stepping motor 72: Movable object 100: Main control board 105: Main CPU
110: Voltage monitoring circuit 112: Setting change means 114: Crystal oscillator 120: Winning lottery means 122: Random number generator 124: Random number extraction means 126: Random number generation means 128: Random number determination means 130: Reel control means 132: Rotation control means 134 : Stop control means 138 : Operation order detection means 140 : Winning determination means 142 : Payout means 144 : Power interruption means 146 : Special role carryover means 148 : Winning flag control means 151 : Special game control means 156 : Hopper motor drive means 158 : Bet number setting means 1000: Sub control board 1002: Production output control means 1004: Rights control means 1005: Sub CPU
1006: Notification output control means 1008: Sub input switch operation means 1010: Movable object control means 1014: Image control board 1018: BL board 1101: Sub control means 1110: Performance control means 1120: Game state notification means 1130: AT lottery means 1140 :AT management means 1150 :AT game count means 1160 :Notification means 1170 :Lottery means 1180 :AT notification means S :Speaker UR :Back surface of lower ball plate ST :Ejection shutter BS1 :Indentation screw BS2 :Protrusion screw DP :Protrusion part RB : RAM clear button RBS : RAM clear button operation surface RBW : RAM clear button frame EB : Error release button EBS : Error release button operation surface EBW : Error release button frame TB : Bottom HN : Heat radiation port P370 : Upper speaker P141 : lower speaker

Claims (1)

Equipped with a ball tray that can store game balls,
The ball tray has a back surface of the ball tray, which is the lower surface when viewed from the player, and a discharge shutter through which game balls cannot pass when in the closed state, and through which game balls can pass when in the open state.
A protruding portion is provided on the back surface of the spherical dish,
The height of the protrusion from the back surface of the ball dish is less than the radius of the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that a length from the back surface of the ball tray to the discharge shutter in a closed state is less than a radius of a game ball.

Images